JP2014226164A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of giving a strong impression to a player when a lamp performance is executed.SOLUTION: In the case where a special lamp performance is executed, an LED lamp is controlled by using a special lighting pattern selection table. A final target color is red, and a step change color is purple. The display color of a first frame is "white"; the display color of a second frame is "black (lights-off)"; the display color of a third frame is "red (a target color)"; the display color of a fourth frame is "black (lights-out)"; the display colors of a fifth frame to a seventh frame is "purple (a stepwise changing color)"; and the display colors of eighth frame and so on are "red (a target color)". While the lamp performance by a blink is being executed from the first frame to the fourth frame, therefore, a gradation is expressed from a fifth frame to a seventh frame so that the final target color can be achieved at the eighth frame.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that controls lighting by outputting a drive signal to a lamp provided in the gaming machine is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the technique of Patent Document 1, when the lighting of the lamp is controlled, the on period and the off period in which the drive signal is output are changed, and thereby the brightness is changed in a plurality of stages every 14 ms. .

  For this reason, according to the technique of patent document 1, it is thought that the game effect by a lamp can be made more interesting.

  Further, as this type of gaming machine, there is disclosed a gaming machine that executes an effect relating to an expectation level as to whether or not a display result of a variable display device (liquid crystal display) is a big hit by controlling light emission of a plurality of light emitting members. (For example, Patent Document 2).

  In the technique of Patent Document 2, a plurality of light emitting members that have been used in the past are used to notify that the identification information is being variably displayed on the variable display device or that a specific gaming state has been reached.

  For this reason, according to the technique of patent document 2, it is thought that there is no need to newly provide a dedicated light-emitting member for the effect that suggests the degree of expectation, and an increase in the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed. .

  Furthermore, as another prior art, there is a technique for controlling LED gradation based on an automatic gradation function of a light emitting element driving circuit (for example, Patent Document 3).

  In the technique of Patent Document 3, the gradation of the LED is controlled based on the automatic gradation function of the light emitting element driving circuit in the first control mode, and the control signal from the external control device is used in the second control mode. Based on this, the gradation of the LED is controlled.

  Thus, according to the technique of Patent Document 3, since the automatic gradation function of the LED can be utilized in the first control mode, it is compared with the case where gradation control corresponding to each of the normal state and the interrupt state is set. Thus, it is considered that the load on the CPU can be reduced.

JP 2003-825 A JP 2004-16507 A JP 2011-172814 A

  Each of the prior arts described above has an advantage in that the control method using the lamp effect is devised to enhance the effect of the lamp effect, to reduce the manufacturing cost, and to reduce the hardware load.

  In such a situation, the technique of Patent Document 1 focuses on improving the effect of the lamp effect.

  Here, in the technique of Patent Literature 1, when starting the lamp effect, the lamp is blinked or the lamp is gradually blinked brightly to increase the effect of the lamp. There is a problem that the lamp only flashes and the impact of the lamp production is poor.

  In this regard, in the technology of Patent Document 2, a plurality of light emitting members arranged in an annular shape are turned on in order, and an effect is given to the player by performing an effect as if the light emission state is rotating. . Moreover, in the technique of patent document 3, since the gradation control of LED is performed based on an automatic gradation function, a suitable impression can be given to a player. However, such a method using rotational light emission and color gradation expression are conventional control methods, and there is no novelty there.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of giving a strong impression to a player when executing a lamp effect.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution has a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery trigger occurs during the game, and when the predetermined lottery is executed, the game is given a predetermined pattern. An effect of executing a predetermined effect based on a result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery execution unit, and a symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery after being displayed in a variable manner over a variable time An execution means, a lamp incorporating a plurality of basic light emitters corresponding to at least the three primary colors of light, and a lighting pattern defining means for prescribing a plurality of types of lighting patterns including special lighting patterns for the lighting patterns of the lamps; Based on the lighting pattern defined by the lighting pattern defining means, the lamp is controlled by lighting the lamp during execution of the predetermined effect. Lamp effect execution means for executing the lighting and all lighting patterns for lighting all of the plurality of basic light emitters as a lighting pattern used first for the special lighting pattern or all lighting for turning off all of the plurality of basic light emitters If the first lighting pattern used as the second lighting pattern is the all lighting pattern, the all lighting pattern is defined and the first lighting pattern used is the first lighting pattern used as the second lighting pattern. In the case of the all-off pattern, the all-on pattern is defined, and the target color lighting pattern for lighting the lamp with a predetermined target color is defined as the third lighting pattern to be used. As the lighting pattern to be used, the all-lighting pattern or the all-light-off pattern is defined, and the fifth point to be used A step change color which is a color for stepwise guiding the lighting color of the lamp to the predetermined target color as a pattern and is turned on with a step change color in which at least one of luminance and color of the predetermined target color is changed A gaming machine that includes a special lighting pattern defining means that defines a lighting pattern and defines the target color light emission pattern as a lighting pattern used after any of the fifth and subsequent timings.

The gaming machine of the present solving means has the following configuration, for example.
(1) When a lottery opportunity occurs during a game (a game ball enters a start winning opening and a game ball passes a start gate), a predetermined lottery is performed. The predetermined lottery corresponds to, for example, a normal symbol lottery (operation lottery), a special symbol lottery (internal lottery), or the like. When this lottery opportunity occurs, a predetermined lottery is performed and the game proceeds.

(2) When the predetermined lottery of (1) above is executed, the symbols (ordinary symbols and special symbols) are variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery ( Is confirmed). The design includes, for example, a symbol visually recognized. It takes a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) from the start of the symbol display to the stop display. Once the symbol display is started, the stop display is completed. The next lottery will not be held until

(3) A predetermined performance is executed based on the result of the predetermined lottery in (1) above. The predetermined effect is executed, for example, within the change display effect (for example, the scroll display effect of the effect symbol on the liquid crystal display) executed within the change time of the above (2) or within the stop display time of the above (2). This is a stop display effect (for example, a stop display effect of an effect symbol on a liquid crystal display). In addition, when the special game is executed in response to the fact that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined winning mode according to the above (2), the predetermined effect is executed in response to the special game (in the big role) Production). Special games are basically 10-round jackpots or 16-round jackpot games, etc., but even with 16-round jackpots, it is a concept that includes jackpots and the like that can obtain substantially the same profit as 10-round jackpots. . The special games include not only big hit games but also small hit games.

(4) There is provided a lamp in which a plurality of basic light emitters (LEDs emitting red light, LEDs emitting green light, and LEDs emitting blue light) corresponding to at least the three primary colors of light are provided. For this reason, the lamp can emit light in full color. The lamp is, for example, a panel lamp or a frame lamp.

(5) Regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp of (4), a plurality of types of lighting patterns including special lighting patterns are defined in advance. A plurality of types of lighting patterns are stored in a lighting pattern selection table or the like. The lighting pattern selection table includes a normal lighting pattern and other lighting patterns in addition to the special lighting pattern. The special lighting pattern is control data for lighting the lamp of the above (4) with a special lighting pattern.

(6) Based on the lighting pattern defined in (5) above, the lamp effect is executed by controlling the lighting of the lamp in (4) during the execution of the predetermined effect in (3) above. For example, a normal lamp effect is executed when a normal lighting pattern is selected, and a special lamp effect is executed when a special lighting pattern is selected.

(7) The special lighting pattern of (5) is defined as follows.
(7-1) As the lighting pattern used for the first (first frame), an all-lighting pattern for turning on all of the plurality of basic light emitters or an all-off pattern for turning off all of the plurality of basic light emitters is defined. When the full lighting pattern is selected, all the plurality of basic light emitters corresponding to the three primary colors of light emit light, so that the lamp emits white light. When the all-off pattern is selected, since the plurality of basic light emitters corresponding to the three primary colors of light do not emit light, the lamp is also turned off (displays in black). Here, the first corresponds basically to the first frame, but is not limited to one frame, and the first extends over a plurality of frames (for example, the first frame, the second frame, etc.). May be. The first time may be the start of a specific effect, or may be a timing delayed from the start of the specific effect.

(7-2) When the first lighting pattern used as the second (second frame) lighting pattern is the all lighting pattern, the all lighting pattern is defined, and the first lighting pattern used is all extinguished. In the case of a pattern, a full lighting pattern is defined.
That is, if the first (frame) is the all-lighting pattern, the second (second frame) is the all-off pattern, and if the first (frame) is the all-off pattern, the second (2 The first (frame) and the second (second frame) are opposite lighting patterns, such as (frame) is a full lighting pattern.

(7-3) A target color lighting pattern for lighting the lamp with a predetermined target color is defined as the lighting pattern used for the third (third frame). The predetermined target color is an arbitrary color to be finally emitted, such as red, green, blue, and yellow.

(7-4) As a lighting pattern used for the fourth (fourth frame), all lighting patterns or all lighting patterns are defined.

(7-5) As a lighting pattern used for the fifth (5th frame, 6th frame, 7th frame), it is a color for stepwise leading the lamp lighting color to a predetermined target color, and the predetermined target color A step change color lighting pattern for lighting at a step change color obtained by changing at least one of the luminance and the color is defined. The step change color is a color used in front of an arbitrary color to be finally emitted. For example, if the final target color is red, the step change color can be set to light red in which the luminance of the target color is changed, purple in which the color of the target color is changed, or the like. By setting the step change color, gradation expression can be realized up to the final target color.

(7-6) A target color light emission pattern is defined as a lighting pattern used after any of the fifth and subsequent timings (after the eighth frame).

  Thus, according to the present solution, first, the blinking pattern of “white → black” or “black → white” is executed by the first and second lighting patterns. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a feeling that something will start, and to attract the player's attention.

  Next, the final lighting pattern in the target color is executed by the third lighting pattern. As a result, the final target color can be transmitted to the player at an early stage.

  Further, a lighting pattern such as “white” or “black” is executed by the fourth lighting pattern. Thereby, the final target color once displayed can be reset once at this time.

  And the lighting pattern in a step change color is executed by the fifth lighting pattern. As a result, the final target color is not displayed suddenly, but the display color can be directed to the final target color step by step.

  Finally, the lamp is lit with the final target color according to the lighting pattern used after any of the fifth and subsequent timings.

  As described above, in the present solution, blinking is expressed by the first to fourth lighting patterns, and gradation is achieved by the fifth and subsequent lighting patterns, thereby realizing light emission by the final target color. it can. For this reason, according to this solution, it is possible to smoothly execute the lamp effect up to the final target color while giving a strong impact to the player at the start of lighting.

  Further, in the present solution, since the light emission pattern with the final target color is arranged in the third lighting pattern, the final purpose is included in the lighting patterns by blinking from the first to the fourth. A light emission pattern by color can be arranged, and a point where a final target color appears can be set as early as possible. For this reason, it is possible to execute a novel lamp effect in which the final target color can be suggested before the final target color is displayed.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution is the solution 1, wherein the special lighting pattern defining means defines a plurality of types of the step-change color lighting patterns used for the fifth, and the fifth and subsequent ones. The gaming machine characterized in that the target color light emission pattern used in is defined as a lighting pattern to be used next to the plurality of types of step change color lighting patterns.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) A plurality of types of step change color lighting patterns to be used fifth are defined. A plurality of types of step change colors are used for a plurality of periods (5th frame, 6th frame, 7th frame), for example. Further, the plurality of types of step change colors are preferably colors that gradually approach the target color (red) (purple → light red purple → dark red purple).
(2) The target color light emission patterns used after the fifth are used (8th frame) next to the plurality of types of step change color lighting patterns (5th frame, 6th frame, 7th frame) of (1) above. It is defined as a lighting pattern.

Thus, according to this solution, since a plurality of types of step change colors are defined, it is possible to execute a lamp effect such that the target color is gradually approached, and the effect can be improved.
Further, according to the present solution, the step change color display period can be made variable, so that the time until the final target color is reached is shortened or the final target color is reached. It is possible to lengthen the time until it is made, and it is possible to flexibly correspond to various effects.

  Solution means 3: The gaming machine of the present solution means that in solution means 1 or 2, the effect execution means executes a result output effect that finally outputs a positive result or a negative result as the predetermined effect. The lamp effect execution means executes the lamp effect executed using the special lighting pattern more frequently when the positive result is output than when the negative result is output. Is a gaming machine characterized by

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) As a predetermined effect, a result output effect that finally outputs a positive result or a negative result is executed. The affirmative result is, for example, an effect at the time of winning if the symbol variation display effect is being performed, or a positive change promotion success effect if the jackpot game effect is being performed. On the other hand, the negative result is, for example, an effect at the time of non-winning if the symbol variation display effect is being performed, and a probability change promotion failure effect or the like if it is during the big hit game effect.

(2) The lamp effect executed using the special lighting pattern is executed more frequently when a positive result is output than when a negative result is output.

  Thus, according to the present solution, the lamp effect is produced using the special lighting pattern when a positive result is output rather than when a negative result is output, that is, when the expectation level of the effect is high. Is executed at a high frequency. For this reason, the special lighting pattern can be used or not used depending on the expectation level of the effect, and even when the same effect is executed, the expectation level of the effect can vary depending on the type of the lamp effect. It is possible to expand the range of expression methods according to the production level.

  Solving means 4: The gaming machine of the present solving means in any one of the solving means 1 to 3, wherein the special lighting pattern defining means has the first, second and A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth lighting pattern used in common is used for a plurality of target colors.

  In this solution, when there are a plurality of predetermined target colors (for example, red, green, blue, yellow, etc.), the lighting patterns used for the first, second, and fourth are common to the plurality of target colors. I will use it. For this reason, parts other than the predetermined target color can be shared, and the burden at the time of creating table data can be reduced, or the control process can be simplified.

  Moreover, although it is a special lighting pattern, by making it a lighting pattern which has a part shared by a part, it not only reduces the work burden and the burden of control processing, but also a third for the player. It is possible to give pleasure such as what target color is displayed in the second order.

  Solution 5: The gaming machine of the present solution, in any one of Solution 1 to 4, the special lighting pattern defining means defines the all lighting pattern as the first lighting pattern used, The gaming machine is characterized in that the all-off pattern is defined as a lighting pattern to be used second, and the all-off pattern is defined as a lighting pattern to be used fourth.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) A full lighting pattern is defined as the first lighting pattern to be used. For this reason, the lamp is lit in white.
(2) The all-off pattern is defined as the second lighting pattern to be used. For this reason, the lamp is not extinguished (becomes black).
(3) The all-off pattern is defined as the fourth lighting pattern to be used. For this reason, the lamp does not light up (becomes black).

  Thus, according to this solution, “white” is arranged in the first (first frame), and “black” is arranged in the second (second frame) and the fourth (fourth frame). Therefore, while performing the lamp effect by blinking up to the fourth (fourth frame), after that, gradation can be started to finally reach the target color.

  Further, in this solution, since “white” is arranged in the first (first frame), the lighting state of the lamp so far can be reset at that time, and a new effect starts from there. That can make a strong impression on the player.

  Further, in the present solution, the “target color” arranged in the third (third frame) is sandwiched between the “black” of the second (second frame) and the fourth (fourth frame). Therefore, the “target color” can be further enhanced by the visual effect caused by turning off the lights.

  Solution 6: The gaming machine of the present solution is any one of Solution 1 to 5, wherein a plurality of the lamps are provided, and the lamp effect executing means is a special specified in the lighting pattern defining means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the lamp effect is executed by using a lighting pattern with a time difference for each of the plurality of lamps.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) A plurality of lamps are provided. For example, it is assumed that 100 lamps in 10 rows and 10 columns are arranged in the game board unit.
(2) The lamp effect is executed by using a special lighting pattern with a time difference for each of the plurality of lamps of (1). For example, lighting of 10 lamps in the 10th row (bottom row) is started at the first timing, and lighting of 10 lamps in the 9th row (second row from the bottom) is started at the second timing. And the lighting of the ten lamps in the eighth row (the third row from the bottom) is started at the third timing.

  For this reason, according to this solution, by using the same special lighting pattern with a time difference, for example, the lamp is lit gradually from the bottom to the top, or the lamp is lit gradually from the left to the right. The lamp can be turned on while rotating in a certain direction. Thereby, it is possible to realize a lamp effect having a high effect such that light flows only by preparing a minimum lighting pattern.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to give a strong impression to a player when executing a lamp effect.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a front view shown about the various lamps with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a big win time variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening big opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning prize closing opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening / closing operation | movement process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning) at the time of corresponding to "10 round normal symbol" etc. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the effect of a big role effect that is executed when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol” or the like (1/9). FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the effect of a big role effect that is executed when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol” or the like (2/9). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (3/9). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (4/9). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (5/9). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (6/9). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (7/9). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (8/9). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (9/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time of a mistake (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time of losing (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in the fireworks rush or the time off (4/4). FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a production of coast mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the 1st example of a lamp production partially (1/5). It is a continuation figure showing partially the 1st production example of a lamp production (2/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the 1st example of a lamp production partially (3/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the 1st example of a lamp production partially (4/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the 1st example of a lamp production partially (5/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the 2nd example of a lamp production partially (1/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the 2nd example of a lamp production partially (2/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the 2nd example of a lamp production partially (3/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the 2nd example of a lamp production partially (4/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the 2nd example of a lamp production partially (5/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (1/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (2/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (3/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (4/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (5/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (6/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (7/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (8/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (9/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (10/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the 3rd example of a lamp production partially (11/11). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a lamp drive process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a lamp effect setting process before an effect symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a lamp production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special lighting pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal lighting pattern selection process. It is a figure which shows a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red). It is a figure which shows a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: blue). It is a figure which shows a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: green). It is a figure which shows a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: yellow). It is a figure which shows a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modification 1). It is a figure which shows a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modification 2). It is a figure which shows a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modification 3). It is a figure which shows a normal lighting pattern selection table (target color: red). It is a conceptual diagram shown about the display color at the time of performing a lamp production using the special lighting pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows a time difference execution timing selection table.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or during the change of the symbol, the display of the big hit, or the like During the big hit game, some kind of effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.) can be generated.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in, for example, an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (not indicated by reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left part of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state), and the right part of the game area 8a is an advantageous game state (big hit game state) , A second game area (right-handed area) used in a small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, and the like. Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning apparatus are provided around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

  Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged at the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a, and the start gate 20, the second variable winning apparatus 31, the first variable winning apparatus 30, and the variable start winning apparatus 28 are arranged in the gaming area. They are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of 8a. Further, the three left normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the one right normal winning hole 24 is arranged in the right part of the game area 8a. The variable start winning device 28 is decorated with “1st” decoration, the first variable winning device 30 is decorated with “2nd” decoration, and the second variable winning device 31 has The surrounding area is decorated with “3rd”.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, or variable start at the time of operation. The player enters the winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, there is a possibility that game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the start gate 20, enter the variable start winning device 28 during operation, or enter the first variable winning device 30 during opening operation. There is a possibility that the player enters a ball, enters the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, or enters the normal winning port 24.

  The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device. The game balls that have entered the device 31 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Of these, the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 30 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 after passing through the transparent collection passage 30c, and the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 are Then, after passing through the transparent collection passage 31c, it is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8.

  Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (the board surface), when a game ball is to enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed) It is necessary to drive a game ball into the area (so-called “left-handed” is executed).

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to be placed in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning port 24, the right side region (right-handed region) in the game region 8a. ) To play a game ball (perform so-called “right-handed”).

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, a right start winning port ( Enables entry into (without reference sign) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, one open / close member 28b, and this open / close member 28b reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by a dotted line in FIG. 3, one open / close member 28b is in the closed position (closed position) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the right start winning opening (game) (There is no gap where the ball can enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the right opening winning opening is opened by expanding the opening width on the right side. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which a game ball can enter, and can enter the right start winning opening (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port) during the opening operation, but the balls are generated randomly.

  The first variable winning device 30 described above is a predetermined first condition (from the first round of the jackpot game) when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning). It operates when the condition of the 10th round) is satisfied, and allows the player to enter the first grand prize opening (no reference sign) (special electric accessory, first special prize event generating means).

  The first variable winning device 30 is a device disposed above the variable start winning device 28 and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the left-right direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, one opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed position) with its tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the first big prize opening (there is no gap for a game ball to enter). State). On the other hand, when the first variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, and the opening width is enlarged on the right side to open the first big prize opening. During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which a game ball can be entered, and can enter the first big winning opening (variable winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the first grand prize opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the first variable prize-winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the ball is generated randomly.

  The second variable winning device 31 described above has a predetermined second condition (the 16th round from the 11th round of the jackpot game) when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner). It is activated when the condition (eye condition) is satisfied, and allows the player to enter the second big prize opening (no reference sign) (special electric accessory, second special prize event generating means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged above the first variable winning device 30, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the left-right direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, one open / close member 31a is in a closed position (closed position) with its tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the second big prize opening (there is no gap for a game ball to enter). State). On the other hand, when the second variable winning device 31 is operated, the opening / closing member 31a is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is enlarged on the right side to open the second big prize opening. During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which a game ball can be entered, and can enter the second big winning opening (variable winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 31a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the second grand prize opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the second variable winning device 31 (the second big winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the opening operation, and the ball is generated randomly.

  In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the center position to the right side portion. The production unit 40 functions as a guide member whose upper edge portion 40a changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various production units 40b, decorative parts 40c, and the like inside. The production unit 40b and the decorative component 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and perform a production operation by emitting transmitted light from a built-in light emitter (LED, etc.), for example. Can do. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, or the like) is attached to the interior of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decorative object having a logo type portion reminiscent of the pachinko machine 1). The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

  In addition, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40k. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. Also, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning port), the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning port), and the second variable winning device 31 (second All game balls that have been driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the big prize opening), are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower left position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Of these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off (symbol display means). The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display, for example, a change state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol by 7 segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is a display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of storing that a game ball has entered the middle start winning port 26 every time a game ball flows into the middle start winning port 26. Each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball, the display mode is decreased by one each time. The second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it stores that the game ball has entered the right start winning port. It changes to the display mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced one by one every time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  The game state display device 38 includes a plurality of LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38d, a short time state display lamp 38e, and a launch position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Details of various lamps]
FIG. 5 is a front view showing various lamps installed in the pachinko machine. The pachinko machine includes a glass frame top lamp 46, a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, a right glass frame decoration lamp 50, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52, a panel lamp 53, and the like. It consists of LED lamp groups.

For example, the glass frame top lamp 46 is configured by a total of eight LED lamp groups including six LED lamps 46a arranged in the lower stage and two LED lamps 46b arranged in the upper stage.
The left glass frame decoration lamp 48 is composed of nine LED lamp groups of LED lamps 48a to 48g arranged in order from the lower stage to the upper stage.

The right glass frame decoration lamp 50 is configured by nine LED lamp groups of LED lamps 50a to 50g arranged in order from the lower stage to the upper stage.
The left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are LED lamps 52a to 52i arranged in order from the lower left side to the upper stage, and 18 LED lamps 52j to 52r arranged in order from the lower right side to the upper stage. It consists of LED lamp groups.

  The LED lamp groups constituting the glass frame top lamp 46, the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are each composed of full-color LED lamps. The full-color LED lamp is a lamp in which three basic light emitters corresponding to the three primary colors of light, that is, a red LED lamp, a green LED lamp, and a blue LED lamp are incorporated.

  In addition, a number of panel lamps 53 are provided in the production unit and the panel. For example, LED lamps 53a and 53b arranged side by side are provided inside the movable body for production 40f, and LED lamps 53c to 53e are provided inside the production unit 40b. Further, an LED lamp 53f is provided inside the second variable winning device 31, and an LED lamp 53g is provided inside the first variable winning device 30. Further, an LED lamp 53h is provided inside the variable start winning device 28, and an LED lamp 53i is provided below the left start winning port 26. Each of the LED lamps 53a to 53i corresponds to a full color LED lamp. Although not specifically shown, in addition to these lamps, a number of LED lamps are arranged in the effect unit and the game board surface.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a medium start winning port 26, a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 corresponding to the middle start winning port switch 80 and the right start winning port, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The start winning port switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entrance of a game ball into the middle start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable prize-winning device 31 (second big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a prize opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of game balls into the normal prize openings 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 22 located on the left side of the board, and in the right prize port switch 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Note that due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are passed through the panel relay terminal board 87. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 includes the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large prize opening solenoid 90, and the second large corresponding to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A prize opening solenoid 97 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 operate (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close operations (activate) the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Let Note that these solenoids 88, 90, 97 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, launch solenoid 110, and ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs an operation of continuously (intermittently) launching the game balls one by one toward the game area 8 as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 to provide various lamps 46 to 52 (LED lamps 46a and 46b). LED lamps 48a to 48g, LED lamps 50a to 50g, 52a to 52r) and panel lamps 53 (LED lamps 53a to 53i), and sound effects and voices are actually output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56. Process.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the tray lamp 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output. .

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Also, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Entered. Furthermore, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136. When the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  7 and 8 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets a vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 8 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power cut-off occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, etc., and then backs up the work area of the RAM 76. The entire contents except the validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 10). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 10). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 10). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 uses the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, and the second big prize opening solenoid 97 as described above. Clear the corresponding output port buffer.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 7).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, a passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, a winning detection signal from the middle start winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning port switch 86. Read the input state (ON / OFF).

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning port switch 80 or the right starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. 2 Controls the display of fluctuation and stop by the special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204), and in this normal symbol game processing The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means, lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls. Output the command.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 combines the drive signals, test signals, etc. of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize winning solenoid 90, and the second big prize winning solenoid 97 stored in the port output request buffer. Output.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) in steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated in the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 10). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning mouth count process. In the first grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning mouth count process. In the second grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 10).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 11). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the upper limit value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. To memorize as a set. The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball generated during the big hit.

  Step S37: When the jackpot is not a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 11). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 12), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 12) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 12) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 12) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area To memorize as a set. The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 12) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the same incoming ball that occurred during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 performs this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 12, step S46 in FIG. 13) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 13). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of small hit, similarly to the above-described process at the time of loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition effect determination process after executing the determination result management process of step S82, and the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12) or the second special symbol of the caller. Return to the storage update process (FIG. 13). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 13). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 described above, and from the result, it is determined whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol” or “probable variation”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “non-probable change (normal) symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 13).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a bonus game variable winning device. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of a management process (step S5000) and a small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed with reference to the flag one by one. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a 10-round jackpot or 16-round jackpot mode, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to a jackpot gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the big win time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the big win variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is set for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until nine game balls are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). The first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In addition, when 16 rounds are won, after the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30, the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is set for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 9 game balls are received). Until the ball is counted), it is excited for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 6 times), whereby the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern (operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are intensively awarded to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game). Execution means). Note that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 in the case of a big hit is referred to as “round”. Sometimes referred to generically. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened / closed from the first round to the 10th round, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed from the 11th round to the 16th round. In addition, in this embodiment, not only 16 round big hits but also 10 round big hits are provided as the types of big hits. For 16 round big hits and 10 round big hits, there are a plurality of winning types (winning symbols). ) May be provided.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big winning variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Alternatively, every time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time shortening state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit prize variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but most of the balls enter the first big prize opening. Does not occur.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the above “10 round big hit”, for example, (1) “10 round normal (non-probable change) big win” and (2) “10 round positive change big win” are provided as a plurality of winning types. . In addition to “10 rounds big hit”, “16 rounds big hit” is provided. For example, (3) “16 rounds probable big hit 1”, (4) “16 rounds probable big hit 2”, (5 ) “16 rounds probable big hit 3” is provided. However, in this embodiment, jackpots other than 10 rounds and 16 rounds may be provided.

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “10 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round normal symbol”, and “10 round probability variable jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round probability jackpot”. Further, “16 round probability variation jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, and “16 round probability variation jackpot 2” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 2”. Further, “16 round probability variation big hit 3” corresponds to big hit of “16 round probability variation big hit 3”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[10 round normal design]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round normal symbols”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. For this reason, in the “10 round normal symbol” jackpot game, 10 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. The first grand prize opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) have occurred in one round. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. However, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” can be obtained by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game ends. Granted to a person.

[10-round probable design]
In the special symbol stop display processing described above, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round probability variation symbol”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. The big hit game of “10 rounds probable change symbol” also gives the player 10 balls (prize balls) for 10 rounds. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16 rounds probabilistic pattern 1]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. The remaining 11th to 16th rounds of the second variable prize winning device 31 of the second variable prize winning device 31 are shorter in time (0.1 second opening time) than the 1st to 10th rounds. Mouth open once. Therefore, the 10th to 16th rounds of the jackpot game of “16 round probability variation pattern 1” are terminated without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 rounds probable variation 1” gives the player about 10 rounds (prize balls). Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16 round probability variation 2]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation 2”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 11th round, which is 16 rounds. Continue to eyes. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 round probability variation 2” gives the player 16 balls (prize balls) for the game. In addition, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) has been won within one round, the second big prize opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16-round probability variation 3]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation 3”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 11th round, which is 16 rounds. Continue to eyes. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 round probability variation 2” gives the player 16 balls (prize balls) for the game. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

  Here, “16-round probability variation 2” and “16-round probability variation symbol 3” are both common in that 16 rounds of play balls (prize balls) are given to the player. In the case of “symbol 2”, the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds is set to be relatively long (for example, about 30 seconds), whereas it corresponds to “16th round probability variation 3” In this case, the difference is that the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds is set to be relatively short (for example, about 2 to 2.5 seconds, which is the same as other interval times). The reason for securing a longer interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of “16 round probability variation 2” is to secure the stage of the round continuation judge production (treasure challenge production). Because.

  In any case, if the winning symbol is one of the above “10-round probability variation symbol”, “16-round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the big hit game ends. The player is given a privilege to shift the internal state to the “high probability state” later. In the “high probability state”, an internal lottery is won, and the winning symbol at that time is “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”. If any of the above is true, the “high probability state” continues (restarts) after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the above “10 round normal symbol” is met, the internal state returns to the normal probability state (low probability state) after the big hit game ends. Needless to say, if the internal lottery is won in the normal probability state and it falls under “10 round normal symbol”, the internal state is maintained in the normal probability state even after the big hit game ends.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small hit, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). (In this embodiment, no small hit is set for the second special symbol). In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly enters the first big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the “probability state” or “time reduction state” The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the small hit game ends. The “time reduction state” does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation occurs. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 → About 3 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability non-time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “7” and “8” correspond to fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that are lost after super reach. Further, the fluctuation pattern number “8” corresponds to a fluctuation pattern that is lost after super reach with zone effect. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach fluctuation pattern” basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach fluctuation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and variation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “27” and “28” correspond to fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that are lost after super reach. On the other hand, since the variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “47” and “48” correspond to fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that are lost after super reach. On the other hand, fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are fluctuation times that are extremely shortened as the fluctuation time in the normal state (for example, about 0.5 seconds) in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in the high probability time reduction state. Is set.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Refer to Fig. 16: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are five types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The five types of breakdown are “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16 round probability variable symbol 3”. Each of the five types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “16 round probability variation 1”, “16 round probability variation 1a”, “16 round probability variation 1b”, “16 round probability variation 1c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of the winning symbol.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “30”, “50”, “15”, “5” is the denominator. Is equivalent to the ratio when 100 is 100. In the second column from the left, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16” corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. Round probability variation 3 "is shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting “10 round normal symbol” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the rate of selecting “10 round probability variable symbol” is 100 minutes. Of 50 (= 50%). In addition, the ratio that “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 15/100 (= 15%), and the ratio that “16 round probability variation 2” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). is there. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol for the first special symbol as a whole is 70%. In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the allocation value for “16 round probability variation 3” is not set.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H02H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times. In addition, in the case of any of “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, or “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big-hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) when the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each allocation value is “30”, “10”, “5”, “5”. , “50” corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16” corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. Round probability variation 3 "is shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “10 round normal symbol” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the rate of selecting “10 round probability variable symbol” is It is 10/100 (= 10%). In addition, the ratio that “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%), and the proportion that “16 round probability variation 2” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). is there. Furthermore, the ratio at which “16 round probability variation 3” is selected is 50/100 (= 50%). Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol as a whole is 70%.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, “04H”, and “05H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as “B2H02H”. .

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times. The other time reduction times are the same as in the case of a big hit with the first special symbol.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the time shortening function is not in operation). The working memory for the second special symbol is more easily accumulated than the working memory for. In this case, if you raise the selection ratio of “3 per 16 rounds probable big change” for the second special symbol, it will be easier to win “3 per 16 rounds probable big hit” than usual, so that will increase the player's profit accordingly This is because there is an advantage of being able to.

[Refer to Fig. 16: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit of 10 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds, for example, a “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach effects” are defined. A variation pattern will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduced state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are not distinguished for the 10-round big hit and the 16-round big hit, but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each big hit (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “61” to “68” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “61” to “66” correspond to the variation pattern (variation pattern satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that is hit after super reach. Further, the fluctuation pattern numbers “65” and “66” correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the super reach with the zone effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “81” to “88” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “81” to “86” correspond to the variation pattern (a variation pattern that satisfies a specific reach occurrence condition) that is a hit after super reach.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “101” to “106” correspond to the variation pattern (variation pattern satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that is hit after super reach. Note that when winning in the high probability time shortening state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without a reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Refer to Fig. 16: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines that the type of winning symbol (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or In the case of any one of “16 round probability variation symbols 3”, the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state setting means). Further, when the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round normal symbol”, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as a gaming state flag (low probability state setting means). .

  Further, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 In the case of either “Round Probability Variation 2” or “16 Round Probability Variation 3”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state) Transition means, time shortening function actuating means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figure 15: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. Then, while referring to the value of the timer counter, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, and step S2410 in FIG. 16). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than “0” in the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 16), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 16).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 15) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “big winning variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol”, a value corresponding to “10 round” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the value indicating “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. The Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 16). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “10 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. . The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply shifted (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the address of the variable winning prize management device processing at the small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In this case, “number of times cut” is used, but the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In the case where there is only a single “time reduction state” instead of the “high probability state”, the count-off counter is set to a standard numerical value (for example, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count-down counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variable function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag is reset, but since the value of the count counter is not zero in the “high probability state” as described above, it is practical. It is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset above. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended through the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated due to the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. . If the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction state display lamp 38e. Output. Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not turned on when the "time reduced state" ends ( OFF).

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates “10 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “10 rounds (10R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “16 rounds (16R)”.

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
Next, details of the big win variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the big win variable winning device management process. The big hit time variable winning device management process is a big hit game process selection process (step S5100), a big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a big hit big winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a big hit time big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the big win variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit special prize opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit special prize opening / closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit special prize opening / closing operation is performed. If the operation process has been completed, the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process and the big hit big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process for big hits]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for the big winning prize opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed and the time of each opening at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). Note that the opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plurality of winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 15). The interval time between rounds is any one of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” or “16 round probability variable symbol 3”. However, it is set to about 2 seconds to 2.5 seconds, for example. However, the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of “16-round probability variation 1” or “16-round probability variation 2” is the scale for the continuous round judgment production (treasure challenge production). In order to ensure, it can be set relatively long (for example, about 30 seconds). Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is, for example, 9 for all winning symbols, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short opening (about 0.1 seconds) ( Not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 16). Specifically, if the major category “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to ten. Further, if “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored as a corresponding value on the program (“9” for 10 times, “15” for 16 times), for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76.

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time easily occurs in the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening during one opening. Sufficient time (for example, a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired by the firing control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot opening timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the opening time is that even if it is not possible to enter the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening during one opening, It is a short time (which becomes difficult) that hardly occurs (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the shooting interval of the game balls by the shooting control board set 174).

  Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 28).

[Big prize opening and closing operation processing at big hit]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning prize opening / closing operation process at the big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, whether or not the interval timer is counting down can be confirmed by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S5314 is already in operation.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 operates, and it shifts from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 29) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning port or the second large winning port being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round of big hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. Next, when the big win variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Run repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 29).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is able to win the variable variable prize at the big hit. Return to the end address of the device management process (FIG. 28). Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the “number of times set in the current round” is determined, for example, “the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened multiple times within one round of big hit” This is to cope with the open pattern. In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Closing the big prize at the big hit]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning prize closing closing process. This big winning time big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 28), the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process is the next jump destination. Execute. Then, after the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process is executed, the big hit big prize opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit special prize opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Run repeatedly. Thus, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (10 times or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at jackpot]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end processing. This big-hit end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 28).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 16) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, about 10,000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the other hand, when a substantial upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability variation number is set to a realistic number (for example, about 70 times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 16) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function activation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 10,000 times or 100 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 15) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, details of the small winning time variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the small winning hour variable winning device management process. The small winning time prize winning device management process includes a small winning game process selection process (step S6100), a small winning time big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hitting big prize opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). The sub-group includes a subroutine group of a small winning big prize opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hitting big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hitting end process (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening the first big prize opening to, for example, two, based on the big prize opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and such an opening time is a ball entering the first big prize opening during one opening. Is a short time (which becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 33). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening and closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operate | moves and it transfers from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous small hitting big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 34) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6308. Execute.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 33). Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step opening before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 returns from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hitting big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 34).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 can change the small hit time. Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 33). Then, when the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Closed big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a small winning big prize closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 34). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit prize opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 33).

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 33), the small jump big prize opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination. Execute. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 33). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the small hit end processing. This small hitting end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hitting. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 33).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), deletes “meeting small hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. It should be noted that in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 15) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “low probability state”. In this way, since the [F1] normal mode is in the “low probability non-time shortened state”, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is started by entering the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26. Progress.

  [F1] In the normal mode, if [F2] “10 round normal symbol” big hit hits, [F3] 10 round big hit game (battle bonus) will be executed, [F4] defeated in the battle of big role effect [F5] Transition to the coast mode.

  [F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortening state. [F5] In the coast mode, when the winning result is not obtained, [F6] When the special symbol fluctuates 100 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  [F1] In normal mode, [F7] 10 round jackpot game (battle bonus) or 16 round real 10 round jackpot game when hitting a big hit of [F7] “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1” (Battle Bonus) is executed, and [F8] wins the battle of the big role production.

  Then, after the end of the 10th round, [F9] treasure challenge effect is executed, but [F10] failure effect is executed, and [F11] fireworks rush is entered. [F11] The fireworks rush is in a high probability time shortened state.

  On the other hand, in [F1] normal mode, when [F12] “16 round probability variation 2” big hit, [F3] 16 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, [F8] win.

  After the 10th round, [F9] treasure challenge production is executed, [F13] success production is executed, [F14] After 11th to 16th rounds, [F11] fireworks Move to rush.

Although not shown in particular, if it is a big hit of “16 round probability variation 3” in [F1] normal mode, [F5] coast mode, [F11] fireworks rush, a 16 round big hit game (special festival bonus) It is executed and shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.
Note that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all of the game flow.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 39 is a continuous diagram showing examples of effect images corresponding to the change display and stop display of special symbols. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
39 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state where the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, on the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference numerals M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. . These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example of (A) in FIG. 39, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (in broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored number display effect execution means).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “10 round big hit” or “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
39 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect). Execution means, production execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is inactive and the probability fluctuation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. The mode corresponding to each internal state will be further described later. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
39 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design stops changing first. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 39, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, the number of markers M1 displayed is linked accordingly. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 39, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 39 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 39 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. (Direction execution means). That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 40 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (winning) in the case of corresponding to “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol” or “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”. . Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  In the following reach production, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 Any aspect of the round probability variation pattern 1 or 2 (for example, 7-segment LED “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc. ) Until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 40, each production | presentation symbol is simplified and shown only as the number. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 40 (A): For example, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
In FIG. 40 (B): Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 40 (C): After the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further from the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 40 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and then the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 40 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. In addition, in this case, if the number “5” is aligned, the expected degree of probability variation jackpot will be high (not the probability variation is confirmed). Can give players various tensions.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 40, (F): After a reach state has occurred, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group, and a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed that passes diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of super reach production (specific reach production execution means)]
In FIG. 40 (G): Following the notice effect after the first reach occurs, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional sequence on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “5” is left as it is without being erased. If the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “5” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “4” actually being erased on the screen and the number “5” remaining on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 40 (H): When the super reach production is approaching the end of the game, the content that the character's image suddenly appears on the screen as if it has been split into a close-up and the character emits some dialogue (or silence) (This may be a content of smiling at the event). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As a reach production different from the above, for example, if “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased and the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end,“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”- There is also a development that “5 is a big hit with a design with a high probability of probability change”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect can be obtained in which the player has a sense of expectation that “the probability big hit is likely to be near”.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 40 (I): For example, the last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to one of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”, but the type of winning symbol is not For example, an effect that tells the player that this time corresponds to either “a normal big hit or a probable big hit” this time by stopping and displaying an effect symbol representing “5” in the center of the screen while making the disclosure. Has been done.

  In FIG. 40 (J): For example, the stop display effect is also displayed for the stop display effect as the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the fixed stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, “whether it is a promising big hit or a normal (non-probable big hit)” can be made undisclosed to the player. .

  In the case of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”, the winning type will not be disclosed after the end of the big hit game, but “16 round probability variable symbol 3” In the case of, the following production techniques can be adopted. In other words, when “16 round probability variation 3” is internally applied, an even number of production symbols are stopped and displayed, and “7” production symbols are stopped and displayed due to another change (for example, a re-lottery production). There is an effect of promoting to “probable change”, or in the stop display effect, even-numbered effect symbols are stopped and displayed and promoted to “probability” in the effect during the big hit game.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is not won, the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is similarly performed in a manner of deviation. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Examples of directorial performance (battle bonus and treasure challenge)]
FIGS. 41 to 49 are partial examples of performances of a big role effect that are executed when any of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2” is applied. FIG.

  In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol”, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is performed in the big role production (battle bonus), and “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 rounds” In the case of “probability pattern 1, 2”, an effect that the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

[Round 1]
41 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect of the big game is started. In the example shown in the figure, a ghost image of an umbrella that is an enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, a female character image that is an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle effect will be started.

  In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, “5” effect symbol) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the five effect symbols”. In the second round of the big hit game, the same effect as the first round is executed.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 41 (B): When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is given in which the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised to run away from the ghost of the umbrella and escapes to the right side of the screen.

[Round 4]
In FIG. 41 (C): When the fourth round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, a female character takes out a round fan (weapon), and an effect is shown in which a flame (aura) appears.

[5th round]
In FIG. 41 (D): And in the fifth round of the jackpot game, the ghost of the umbrella gives out a special technique that makes the long tongue pop out from the mouth, and the female character greets the special technique with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with “10 round normal symbol”, and if the female character wins, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2” It means that one of them was a big hit.

[6th round (when 10th round normal symbol wins)]
In FIG. 42 (E): In the case of winning with the 10-round normal symbol, the defeat effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, an umbrella ghost is displayed with a letter “defeat ...”, and a female character is displayed smaller (a teammate character defeat production).

[7th round (10 rounds when normal symbol is selected)]
In FIG. 42 (F): In the case of winning in the 10th round normal symbol, the re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a line such as “Next is not defeated!”. As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for the big hit again. Note that the re-challenge promotion effect similar to the seventh round is executed in the eighth to tenth rounds of the big hit game.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 42 (G): At the timing when the big hit game with the 10-round normal symbol ends (during end processing), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[6th round (at the time of winning the 10th round)
In FIG. 43 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the victory effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed larger with the letters “Victory !!”, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed smaller (Allied character victory effect).

[Round 7]
In FIG. 43 (I): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, a blessing effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, a hermit character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect of producing the line “I did it well!” Is executed. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player that he has won the battle production.

[10th round]
In FIG. 43 (J): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the blessing effect starting from the seventh round is continued until the tenth round. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which a female character performing a peace sign emits the line “I did it!”.

[Treasure challenge production]
In FIG. 43 (K): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, a treasure challenge effect is executed after 10 rounds have ended. In the treasure challenge production, the horse character pulls the treasure, and if the treasure can be attracted, six substantial jackpot rounds are added. The treasure challenge production is executed at the end time after the 10th round is completed in the case of winning with the “10th round probability variation symbol”, and in the case of “16th round probability variation symbol 1, 2” the tenth round. And the interval time between the 11th round.

[Game description production]
In FIG. 44 (L): When the treasure challenge effect is started, a game explanation effect is first executed. In the example shown in the figure, a hermit character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “If you draw a treasure, add a round!”.

  In FIG. 44 (M): When the game explanation effect ends, an item provision effect in which the female character provides an item is executed. Specifically, an effect in which a female character straddling a horse takes out an item (food) is executed.

  (N) in FIG. 44: Then, an effect is performed in which the horse character eats the food provided by the female character. At this time, for example, depending on the type of item to be provided, the reliability of success or failure in the treasure challenge effect can be varied.

  In FIG. 45, (O): The screen is switched, the sharp eyes of the horse character are displayed, and the characters “Ready” are displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 45 (P): The characters “GO!” Are displayed at the top of the screen, indicating that the effect switching button 45 has started to be repeatedly struck. In addition, a button image in which the effect switching button 45 is simplified is displayed in the lower left area of the display screen, and an effect that prompts the player to press the effect switching button 45 is performed. Around the button image, a time meter indicating the lapse of the button effective time is displayed so as to surround the button image, and here, one square corresponds to about 1 second. In the example shown in the figure, all the eight square time meters are displayed as colored images, so that the press of the effect switching button 45 is effective for about 8 seconds from now on. Each square of the time meter decreases by one square every time 1 second elapses.

  In FIG. 45 (Q): It is assumed that the player has started striking the effect switching button 45 in response to an effect prompting the player to press the effect switching button 45. Then, the horse character begins to step on the foot in response to repeated hitting of the effect switching button 45, and the effect of gradually moving to the left is executed. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are 6 squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about 6 seconds.

  In FIG. 46, (R): The player is continuously hitting the effect switching button 45 continuously. In the illustrated example, the horse character has reached the vicinity of the center. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are four squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about four seconds.

  In FIG. 46 (S): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. In the illustrated example, the horse character has reached the left end of the screen. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are two squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about two seconds.

  In FIG. 46, (T): When the repetitive striking effect of the effect switching button 45 has reached the final stage, a cut-in notice effect is suddenly displayed that is displayed on the screen as if the character image is split into a large image. . In the example shown in the figure, a female character is displayed in an area cut diagonally on the screen, and a scene in which the female character is praying with both hands together is displayed. At this time, since the time meter has one remaining cell, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about one second.

[When winning 16 rounds probable symbol 2]
In FIG. 47 (U): In the case of winning with “16-round probability variation 2”, a successful production in the treasure challenge production is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the treasure tied to the tip of the string pulled by the horse character pops out vigorously.

  In FIG. 47 (V): The character “success” is displayed at the top of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “Looking!”. Such a successful effect corresponds to “16-round probability variation 2”, and a predetermined random number lottery (for example, 1/10) executed when the button is pressed once within the button effective time. When winning in the random number lottery to be won), it is executed when the button is pressed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) within the button effective time or when the button effective time elapses.

[Eleventh round]
In FIG. 47 (W): When the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds ends, the 11th round starts. The eleventh and subsequent rounds are positioned as special rounds, and character information of “special round” is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and a female character unique to the special round is displayed.

[12th round]
In FIG. 48 (X): Special round effects are continued in the 12th round as well. In the illustrated example, a female character unique to the special round is displayed.

[16th round]
In FIG. 48 (Y): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and moves to the final 16 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the special round A unique effect image is displayed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 48 (Z): At the timing when the big hit game is ended, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[At the time of winning 10-round probability variation symbol or 16-round probability variation symbol 1]
49 (a): On the other hand, in the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1”, a failure rendering in the treasure challenge effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which a string pulled by a horse character breaks in the middle.

  In FIG. 49 (b): The character “failure” is displayed at the top of the screen, and the effect that the character of the hermit emits the speech “sorry” is executed. Such failure production is executed by using a part of the end time in the case of winning with “10th round probability variation symbol”, and from the 11th round in the case of winning with “16th round probability variation symbol 1”. It is executed using the fast opening time up to the 16th round. In addition, in the 11th to 16th rounds when winning with “16 round probability variation 1”, the second variable winning device 31 is opened 4 times, but the opening time is set extremely short, so The profit by is hardly obtained.

[At the end of a major role]
(C) in FIG. 49: At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Examples of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 50 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is a mode that is shifted to after a big hit game when either of the “10 round probability variation symbols” or “16 round probability variation symbols 1, 2, 3” corresponds to a big hit. Fireworks rush is a state with high probability time reduction. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 50 (A): For example, the first variation display after the end of the big hit game is performed, whereby the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of “fireworks rush”. In order to deeply impress the player with the fireworks motif, the background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 50 (B): Since the first fluctuation after the end of the big hit game (during non-winning) has ended, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 50: When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game ends. In addition, in the example of illustration, the fluctuation | variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol is shown. In the high probability time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated, so that as long as the player continues to make a right turn, the effect symbol variation display accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. There are many.

FIGS. 51 to 54 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects executed when winning or losing fireworks rush.
The following effect examples are effect examples that are executed when a big hit is made in the fireworks rush or when a loss reach effect is selected. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 51, (A): The effect symbol is displayed in a “fireworks rush” state. In the example shown in the drawing, a background image expressing “a scene where a female character is watching fireworks” is displayed together with “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky”. In addition, a fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, the fourth symbol Z2 varies. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 51 (B): For example, an effect is produced in which a female character utters the line “Game! By executing such an effect, it is possible to give the player an impression that “something will begin in the future”. In addition, from this point of time, in order to display the effect of making the ally character and the enemy character play against each other on the screen, the effect display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen (“2”). -"Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating").

  51 (C): For example, a panda character (enemy character) appears on the left side of the screen, a female character (friend character) appears on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” appears in the center of the screen. Production to be performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle reach effect will be started. It should be noted that a reach state has occurred in the effect symbol that is variably displayed at the upper left of the screen ("2"-"fluctuating"-"2").

  In FIG. 52 (D): After that, the battle reach effect is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which the panda character moves toward the female character. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

  In FIG. 52 (E): This time, a female character takes out a drum (weapon), and an effect in which a flame (aura) appears from the drum is performed. In this effect example, an effect of fighting an enemy character using a drum is executed, but an effect of fighting an enemy character using a fan, for example, can also be executed. Thus, the expectation degree of jackpot can be changed by changing the weapon used for a battle.

  In FIG. 52 (F): An effect is performed in which the female character turns the drum toward the panda character.

  In FIG. 53 (G): Subsequently, an effect in which a wave is emitted from the drum is executed. If you can defeat the panda character in this state, it will be a big hit.

[When disconnected]
In FIG. 53 (H): When the variation of the special symbol this time corresponds to non-winning, an effect is performed in which the panda character successfully avoids the wave fired from the drum.

  In FIG. 53 (I): A panda character is displayed in a large size together with a character “defeated...” And a female character is displayed in a small size. Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced ("2"-"3"-"2").

  53 (J): In this case, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the special symbol stop display. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  After this, since the fireworks rush continues, the player will aim for the next big hit during the fireworks rush.

[When winning]
In FIG. 53 (K): On the other hand, when the special symbol variation this time corresponds to a big hit, the panda character has a wave, which causes an explosion, causing the panda character to fly away. Executed.

  In FIG. 53 (L): When the female character is displayed large together with the characters “Victory!” And the panda character is displayed small, it is transmitted to the player that it is a big hit (winning). At the upper left corner of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced (“2”-“2”-“2”). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped.

  In FIG. 53 (M): The effect symbols are returned to the state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also in a changing state.

[Promotion opportunity promotion]
In FIG. 54 (N): When there are three production symbols, it is decided that the big hit is there, but it determines the number of rounds (the number of rounds) depends on the size of the profit (outgoing ball) obtained by the big hit game. Promotion chance production is executed.
In the example shown in the drawing, the character information “promotion chance” is displayed on the upper part of the screen. As a result, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the promotion chance effect will be started from now, and the player may be promoted from “2 effect design” to “7 effect design”.

  In FIG. 54, (O): the effect pattern in which the three lined effect symbols are displayed gradually smaller and the effect line in which the three lined effect symbols are sucked into the back side of the screen while rotating is executed.

  54 (P): The three effect symbols become so small that they are hardly visible. At that time, the image of the effect switch button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the player presses the press of the effect switch button 45. An effect is urged.

[Promotion chance failure production]
54 (Q): If the promotion chance effect fails, that is, if it falls under either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the promotion chance failure rendering is Executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. In this case, however, the number of the production symbol is not changed (it remains “2”).

  54 (R): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. The fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, green display color) corresponding to the “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”. Thereafter, the above-described battle bonus effect (acting during the big role) is executed on the screen.

[Promotion of successful promotion]
54 (S): On the other hand, if the promotion chance effect is successful, that is, if it corresponds to “16-round probability variation 3”, the promotion chance success effect is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. The number of the production symbol is changed from “2” to “7”.

  In FIG. 54 (T): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. The fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, orange display color) corresponding to the “16-round probability variable symbol 3”. After that, a special festival bonus effect (acting during the big role) is executed on the screen that is a big hit of 16 rounds.

[Director-in-chief production (special festival bonus production)]
FIG. 55 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the big-game effect executed during the big hit game in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”. This big role production is executed, for example, when a success production is executed in the above promotion chance production.

[1 round]
In FIG. 55 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the number “7”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In addition, characters of “Special Festival Bonus” are displayed in the lower left area of the display screen, and images about festivals such as “Uchiwa” and “Taiko” are displayed around the screen.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 55 (B): After this, the jackpot game proceeds smoothly, and when it moves to the final 16 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the jackpot game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. Further, the effect symbol (the number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
(C) in FIG. 55: At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush state with a high probability time reduction state as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of coast mode production]
FIG. 56 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the coast mode effect. This coast mode is a mode that is shifted to after the end of the big hit game in the case of the “10 round normal symbol”. The coast mode is a “low probability time reduction state”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  FIG. 56 (A): For example, after the big hit game in “10 round normal symbol” is finished, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “coast mode” state. Yes. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with motifs of images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” in order to express the healing impression that is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 56 (B): Since the current change (during non-winning) has been completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  In FIG. 56 (C): The next fluctuation is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining a winning result. When the coast mode ends, the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state is entered. If a winning result is obtained in the coast mode, a reach effect is executed and a big hit is achieved.

[First example of lamp production]
57 to 61 are continuous diagrams partially showing a first effect example of a lamp effect.
The first effect example shows an example in which a special lamp effect is executed using the effect unit 40b.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 57 (A): In synchronization with the start of the variation of the special symbol, the left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, and right effect symbol rows are scrolled in the vertical direction on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to be varied. Production begins. At the start of fluctuation, the LED lamps 53c to 53e are turned off. In the following figure, the lamp display color is indicated by a black circle when the LED lamp is off, and is indicated by a white circle when the LED lamp emits white light. If the LED lamp emits light in a step change color (for example, purple), it is indicated by a light gray circle, and if the LED lamp emits light in a target color (for example, red), it has a halftone dot Shown in dark gray circles.

[Button image display effect]
57 (B): When a predetermined time (about 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change of the special symbol, a button image in which the effect switching button 45 is simplified is displayed at the center position of the screen. An effect that prompts the player to press is performed. A time meter indicating the passage of the button effective time is displayed around the button image so as to surround the button image. In the example shown in the figure, all of the 8 square hour meters are displayed as colored images, so that all the button effective times remain.

[Specified time elapsed]
(C) in FIG. 57: A predetermined time (a time corresponding to 2 squares of the hour meter) has elapsed since the start of the button effective time, and the remaining squares of the hour meter are 6 squares.

〔Press button〕
58 (D): Here, it is assumed that the player has pressed the effect switching button 45. Then, the advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach is executed on the screen. Specifically, an effect is displayed in which character information such as “hot” is displayed in the center of the screen. The effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a reduced state at the upper left corner of the screen ("Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating").

[Left effect symbol stop]
58 (E): When the pre-reach notice effect is completed, the left effect symbol representing the number “1” stops at the middle position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
(F) in FIG. 58: Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed thereafter. At this point, the right effect design representing the number “1” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen. When the right effect design is stopped and displayed, a reach state of the numbers “1”-“being changed”-“1” is generated in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs]
59 (G): When a reach state occurs, for a while, for example, an image representing a cat character forms a group and passes through the screen from the upper right to the lower left. Done. By executing such a notice effect after the occurrence of reach, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained. Then, the advance notice effect after the occurrence of reach is executed as if the group target image (cat character image) is being discharged from the effect unit 40b.

[First frame]
In the first frame of the notice effect after the reach occurs, an effect in which the group target image in the first row is displayed as viewed from the effect unit 40b is executed, and an effect in which the LED lamps 53c to 53e emit white light is executed.

[2nd frame]
59 (H): In the second frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the second row is displayed as viewed from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the effect that the LED lamps 53c to 53e are turned off is executed. Is done.

[3rd frame]
59 (I): In the third frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the third column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e emit red light. Is executed.

[4th frame]
In FIG. 60, (J): In the fourth frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the fourth column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the effect that the LED lamps 53c to 53e are turned off is executed. Is done.

[5th frame]
In FIG. 60, (K): In the fifth frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the fifth column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e emit purple light. Is executed.

[6th frame]
In FIG. 60 (L): In the sixth frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the sixth column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e emit purple light. Is executed.

[7th frame]
61 (M): In the seventh frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the seventh column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e emit purple light. Is executed.

[Eighth frame]
In FIG. 61, (N): In the eighth frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the eighth column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e emit red light. Is executed.
After that, the reach effect described above is executed, and the effect that the big hit is lost is executed.

[Second example of lamp production]
62 to 66 are continuous diagrams partially showing a second effect example of the lamp effect.
The second effect example shows an example in which a normal lamp effect is executed using the effect unit 40b. The difference between a normal lamp production and a special lamp production is that the special lamp production uses a special lighting pattern in which the target lamp (red) is shifted step by step, whereas the normal lamp production is A normal lighting pattern in which the target color (red) is displayed from the beginning is used.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 62 (A): In synchronization with the start of the change of the special symbol, the left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, and right effect symbol rows are scrolled in the vertical direction on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. At the start of fluctuation, the LED lamps 53c to 53e are turned off.

[Button image display effect]
62 (B): When a predetermined time (about 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change of the special symbol, a button image in which the effect switching button 45 is simplified is displayed at the center position of the screen. An effect that prompts the player to press is performed. A time meter indicating the passage of the button effective time is displayed around the button image so as to surround the button image. In the example shown in the figure, all of the 8 square hour meters are displayed as colored images, so that all the button effective times remain.

[Specified time elapsed]
In FIG. 62 (C): The predetermined time (the time corresponding to 2 squares of the hour meter) has elapsed since the start of the button effective time, and the remaining squares of the hour meter are 6 squares.

〔Press button〕
In FIG. 63 (D): Here, it is assumed that the player has pressed the effect switching button 45. Then, the advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach is executed on the screen. Specifically, an effect is displayed in which character information of “chance” is displayed in the center of the screen. The effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a reduced state at the upper left corner of the screen ("Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating").

[Left effect symbol stop]
In FIG. 63 (E): When the pre-reach notice effect is completed, the left effect symbol representing the number “2” stops at the middle position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 63 (F): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed thereafter. At this time, the right effect design representing the number “2” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen. When the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed, a reach state of the numbers “2”-“being changed”-“2” is generated in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs]
In FIG. 64 (G): After a reach state has occurred, for example, an image representing a cat character forms a group and passes through the screen from the upper right to the lower left. Done. By executing such a notice effect after the occurrence of reach, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained. Then, the advance notice effect after the occurrence of reach is executed as if the group target image (cat character image) is being discharged from the effect unit 40b.

[First frame]
In the first frame of the notice effect after the reach occurs, the effect that the group target image in the first row is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the effect that the LED lamps 53c to 53e emit red light is executed. As described above, in a normal lamp effect, the LED lamps 53c to 53e emit light in the target color red from the beginning.

[2nd frame]
FIG. 64 (H): In the second frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the second column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e continue to emit red light. An effect is performed.

[3rd frame]
In FIG. 64, (I): In the third frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, an effect in which the group target image in the third column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e continue to emit red light. An effect is performed.

[4th frame]
In FIG. 65, (J): In the fourth frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the fourth column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e continue to emit red light. An effect is performed.

[5th frame]
65 (K): In the fifth frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the fifth column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e continue to emit red light. An effect is performed.

[6th frame]
In FIG. 65, (L): In the sixth frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the sixth column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e continue to emit red light. An effect is performed.

[7th frame]
66 (M): In the seventh frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the seventh column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e continue to emit red light. An effect is performed.

[Eighth frame]
In FIG. 66 (N): In the eighth frame of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach, the effect that the group target image in the eighth column is displayed as seen from the effect unit 40b is executed, and the LED lamps 53c to 53e continue to emit red light. An effect is performed.
After that, the reach effect described above is executed, and the effect that the big hit is lost is executed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, even when the same group notice effect is executed, a special lighting pattern that gradually shifts to the target color and a normal lighting pattern that displays the target color from the beginning are properly used. Therefore, it is possible to execute different types of effects while maintaining the same color, such as a weak red lamp with a high degree of expectation for a big hit and a strong red lamp with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. An expression method is possible.

[Third production example of lamp production]
67 to 77 are continuous views partially showing a third effect example of the lamp effect.
The third effect example shows an example in which a special lamp effect is executed using the glass frame top lamp 46, the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52. .

[Variable display production start]
67 (A): In synchronization with the start of the change of the special symbol, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are scrolled in the vertical direction on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48g are turned off.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side, the LED lamps 50a to 50g are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52i are turned off.
For the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52j to 52r are turned off.

[Zone entry production start]
In FIG. 67 (B): When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change of the special symbol, a shutter (door) appears from the upper part of the display screen, and an effect that closes at the lower end part is performed. At the upper left corner position of the screen, the reduced three effect symbols are variably displayed. Further, it is assumed that a specific variation pattern (a variation pattern corresponding to a super reach effect with a zone effect) is selected as the special symbol variation here. This zone entry effect follows the shutter release effect in which the closed shutter is gradually opened.

[First frame]
(C) in FIG. 68: In the first frame of the shutter opening effect, the effect that the closed shutter is raised to the first stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48g are turned off.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side, the LED lamps 50a to 50g are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a and 52b are lit in white, and the LED lamps 52c to 52i are turned off.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 52 on the right side, the LED lamps 52j and 52k are lit in white, and the LED lamps 52l to 52r are turned off.

[2nd frame]
(D) in FIG. 68: In the second frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect is performed in which the closed shutter is raised to the second stage. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48g are turned off.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side, the LED lamps 50a to 50g are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52c and 52d are lit in white, and the LED lamps 52a, 52b and 52e to 52i are turned off.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52l and 52m are lit in white, and the LED lamps 52j, 52k, and 52n to 52r are turned off.

[3rd frame]
In FIG. 69 (E): In the third frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect is performed in which the closed shutter is raised to the third stage. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48g are turned off.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side, the LED lamps 50a to 50g are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a and 52b are lit in red, the LED lamps 52c and 52d are turned off, the LED lamps 52e and 52f are lit in white, and the LED lamps 52g- 52i is turned off.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52j and 52k are lit in red, the LED lamps 52l and 52m are turned off, the LED lamps 52n and 52o are lit in white, and the LED lamps 52p to 52p. 52r is turned off.

[4th frame]
In FIG. 69, (F): In the fourth frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is raised to the fourth stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48g are turned off.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side, the LED lamps 50a to 50g are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a and 52b are turned off, the LED lamps 52c and 52d are turned on in red, the LED lamps 52e and 52f are turned off, and the LED lamps 52g and 52h are turned on. It is lit white and the LED lamp 52i is off.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52j and 52k are turned off, the LED lamps 52l and 52m are turned on in red, the LED lamps 52n and 52o are turned off, and the LED lamps 52p and 52q are turned on. It is lit white and the LED lamp 52r is off.

[5th frame]
In FIG. 70, (G): In the fifth frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is raised to the fifth stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamp 48a is lit white and the LED lamps 48b to 48g are turned off.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side, the LED lamp 50a is lit white and the LED lamps 50b to 50g are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a and 52b are lit purple, the LED lamps 52c and 52d are unlit, the LED lamps 52e and 52f are lit red, and the LED lamps 52g, 52g, 52h is turned off, and the LED lamp 52i is turned on in white.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52j and 52k are lit in purple, the LED lamps 52l and 52m are turned off, the LED lamps 52n and 52o are lit in red, and the LED lamps 52p, 52q is turned off, and the LED lamp 52r is turned on in white.

[6th frame]
In FIG. 70, (H): In the sixth frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is raised to the sixth stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamp 48a is turned off, the LED lamps 48b and 48c are turned on in white, and the LED lamps 48d to 48g are turned off.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, the LED lamp 50a is turned off, the LED lamps 50b and 50c are turned on in white, and the LED lamps 50d to 50g are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52d are lit purple, the LED lamps 52e and 52f are unlit, the LED lamps 52g and 52h are lit red, and the LED lamp 52i is Off.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52j to 52m are lit in purple, the LED lamps 52n and 52o are turned off, the LED lamps 52p and 52q are lit in red, and the LED lamp 52r is Off.

[7th frame]
In FIG. 71, (I): In the seventh frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is raised to the seventh stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamp 48a is lit in red, the LED lamps 48b and 48c are turned off, the LED lamps 48d and 48e are lit in white, and the LED lamps 48f and 48g are Off.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, the LED lamp 50a is lit in red, the LED lamps 50b and 50c are turned off, the LED lamps 50d and 50e are lit in white, and the LED lamps 50f and 50g are Off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52f are lit in purple, the LED lamps 52g and 52h are turned off, and the LED lamp 52i is lit in red.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52j to 52o are lit in purple, the LED lamps 52p and 52q are turned off, and the LED lamp 52r is lit in red.

[Eighth frame]
In FIG. 71, (J): In the eighth frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is raised to the eighth stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamp 48a is turned off, the LED lamps 48b and 48c are turned on in red, the LED lamps 48d and 48e are turned off, and the LED lamps 48f and 48g are white. Lights up.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, the LED lamp 50a is turned off, the LED lamps 50b and 50c are turned on in red, the LED lamps 50d and 50e are turned off, and the LED lamps 50f and 50g are white. Lights up.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a and 52b are lit in red, the LED lamps 52c to 52h are lit in purple, and the LED lamp 52i is turned off.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52j and 52k are lit in red, the LED lamps 52l to 52q are lit in purple, and the LED lamp 52r is turned off.

[9th frame]
In FIG. 72 (K): In the ninth frame of the shutter opening effect, the effect that the closed shutter is raised to the ninth stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are lit in white.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamp 48a is lit purple, the LED lamps 48b and 48c are turned off, the LED lamps 48d and 48e are lit red, and the LED lamps 48f and 48g are Off.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side, the LED lamp 50a is lit in purple, the LED lamps 50b and 50c are turned off, the LED lamps 50d and 50e are lit in red, and the LED lamps 50f and 50g are Off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52d are lit in red, and the LED lamps 52e to 52i are lit in purple.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52j to 52m are lit in red, and the LED lamps 52n to 52r are lit in purple.

[10th frame]
In FIG. 72 (L): In the 10th frame of the shutter opening effect, the effect that the shutter that has been closed rises to the 10th stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48c are lit in purple, the LED lamps 48d and 48e are turned off, and the LED lamps 48f and 48g are lit in red.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, the LED lamps 50a to 50c are lit in purple, the LED lamps 50d and 50e are turned off, and the LED lamps 50f and 50g are lit in red.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52f are lit in red, and the LED lamps 52g to 52i are lit in purple.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52j to 52o are lit in red, and the LED lamps 52p to 52r are lit in purple.

[11th frame]
In FIG. 73, (M): In the eleventh frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter rises to the eleventh stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are lit in red.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48e are lit in purple, and the LED lamps 48f and 48g are turned off.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side, the LED lamps 50a to 50e are lit in purple, and the LED lamps 50f and 50g are turned off.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52h are lit in red, and the LED lamp 52i is lit in purple.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52j to 52q are lit in red, and the LED lamp 52r is lit in purple.

[12th frame]
In FIG. 73, (N): In the 12th frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is raised to the 12th stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are turned off.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 48 on the left side, the LED lamp 48a is lit in red, and the LED lamps 48b to 48g are lit in purple.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side, the LED lamp 50a is lit in red, and the LED lamps 50b to 50g are lit in purple.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52i are lit in red.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 52 on the right side, the LED lamps 52j to 52r are lit in red.

[13th frame]
In FIG. 74, (O): In the thirteenth frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is raised to the thirteenth stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are lit in purple.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48c are lit in red, and the LED lamps 48d to 48g are lit in purple.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, the LED lamps 50a to 50c are lit in red, and the LED lamps 50d to 50g are lit in purple.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52i are lit in red.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 52 on the right side, the LED lamps 52j to 52r are lit in red.

[14th frame]
In FIG. 74, (P): In the 14th frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is raised to the 14th stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are lit in purple.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48e are lit in red, and the LED lamps 48f and 48g are lit in purple.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, the LED lamps 50a to 50e are lit in red, and the LED lamps 50f and 50g are lit in purple.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52i are lit in red.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 52 on the right side, the LED lamps 52j to 52r are lit in red.

[15th frame]
In FIG. 75, (Q): In the 15th frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is raised to the 15th stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are lit in purple.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48g are lit in red.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, the LED lamps 50a to 50g are lit in red.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52i are lit in red.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 52 on the right side, the LED lamps 52j to 52r are lit in red.

[16th frame]
In FIG. 75, (R): In the 16th frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is raised to the 16th stage is executed. Moreover, the state of various lamps is as follows.

[Lamp condition]
Regarding the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED lamps 46a and 46b are lit in red.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 48, the LED lamps 48a to 48g are lit in red.
Regarding the right glass frame decoration lamp 50, the LED lamps 50a to 50g are lit in red.
Regarding the left glass frame decoration lamp 52, the LED lamps 52a to 52i are lit in red.
Regarding the glass frame decoration lamp 52 on the right side, the LED lamps 52j to 52r are lit in red.

[17th frame]
In FIG. 76, (S): In the 17th frame of the shutter opening effect, an effect in which the closed shutter is fully opened is executed. Then, at the stage where the door is opened, for example, the text information “Animal zone entry!” Is displayed, and the background image is switched to a mode representing “animal zone”. In the animal zone, for example, a state where a plurality of animals are bent is produced in a stunning manner together with an “outdoor scene”. Moreover, the state of the various lamps after this is the same as in the 16th frame.

[Direction during the zone]
In FIG. 76 (T): The variable display effect is continued by scrolling the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, in the illustrated example, a strip-like image (an image in which characters of the animal zone are displayed) indicating that the current state is executing the zone effect is displayed in two diagonal rows. By such an effect, it can be transmitted to the player that the player has entered the zone effect.

[Left effect symbol stop]
In FIG. 77 (U): The left effect design representing the number “7” is stopped and displayed on the left side of the display screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 77 (V): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol is subsequently stopped and displayed. At this time, the right effect design representing the number “7” is stopped and displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the reach state of the numbers “7”-“being changed”-“7” is generated in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. Further, on the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed.
After that, the reach effect described above is executed, and the effect that the big hit is lost is executed.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach notice effect, memory number display effect, big role effect, lamp effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a change pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol based on the result of the internal lottery, or the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable prize. The content of the effect at the time of the opening / closing operation | movement of the apparatus 31 is controlled (effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132 (lamp effect executing means). In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol and an effect of erasing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 78).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is performed when the big winning variable variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 15) is selected by the main control CPU 72 or the small winning variable variable winning device management process (FIG. 15). When the middle step S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to a loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 10 rounds of big hit, the production control CPU 126 selects a big role production pattern of 10 rounds of big win as the production contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the production display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). To do. As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 78) and the lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 78). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the change effect pattern number (result output effect at the time of the small hit) based on the change pattern command (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. To do. The variation effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the variation effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. be able to. Note that the variation effect pattern number may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of variation effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the variation effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule (change time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, The mode of the stop display is determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the change effect pattern number (result output effect at the time of big hit) based on the change pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. . In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the change effect pattern number at the time of departure (result output effect at the time of loss) based on the change pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. . Variation effect pattern numbers at the time of loss are categorized as “out of normal fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, etc., and “rear reach fluctuation” defines a fine reach fluctuation pattern. . Note that which variation effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the variation effect pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) In this case, reach type and reach occurrence timing) and a stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.) are determined. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect (the notice effect before reach occurrence, the notice effect after reach, etc.) to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is “normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 selects a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 39B) where the female character is sitting on the chaise longue. Execute the process. When the stay mode is “fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 50A) having fireworks as a motif. Run. Furthermore, when the stay mode is “coast mode (low probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image having the coast as a motif (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 56A). Run.

  Step S618: The effect control CPU 126 executes a zone effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the zone effect. For example, when the variation pattern in which the super reach effect with the zone effect is executed is selected, the effect control CPU 126 enters the animal zone from the current stay mode (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 67 to 77). The process which selects the production pattern which performs is performed.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 80), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S802. If the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S804. Run.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S808. Run.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fireworks rush big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the change effect pattern number at that time based on the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIGS. If the variation pattern command is a command corresponding to a super reach effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the super reach effect (specific reach effect execution means), and the change pattern command is a reach other than the super reach effect. In the case of a command corresponding to an effect (normal reach effect or long reach effect), the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to a reach effect other than the super reach effect (the same applies hereinafter).

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the change effect pattern number at that time based on the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a reach effect is executed in the coast mode, and a process of selecting an effect that is a big hit is executed.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the change effect pattern number at that time based on the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIG.

  And after finishing the process of step S804, step S806, or step S808, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 81).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above-described variation effect pattern selection processing at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S852. Run.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S858. Run.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing at the time of fireworks rush failure. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the change effect pattern number at that time based on the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIGS.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process when the coast mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the change effect pattern number at that time based on the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG. 56 and the like is executed.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing when the normal mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the change effect pattern number at that time based on the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG. 39 or the like is executed.

  And after finishing the process of step S854, step S856, or step S858, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 81).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device operating process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S752), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S754), variable winning device operating processing (step S756), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S758). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S752: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S754 to S758) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S754) as the next jump destination. Further, if the variable winning device operating pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S756) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-process (step S758) as the next jump destination.

  Step S754: In the variable winning device pre-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the contents of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning with “10 round normal symbol”, a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the battle effect is executed. In addition, in the case of winning with “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1”, a process is performed to select an effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character in the battle direction and fails in the treasure challenge direction. To do. Furthermore, in the case of winning with “16 round probability variation 2”, a process is performed in which a teammate character wins an enemy character in a battle production and selects a production that succeeds in a treasure challenge production and a special round production. . Furthermore, in the case of winning with “16 round probability variation 3”, processing for selecting a special festival bonus effect is executed.

  Step S756: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 (a treasure challenge effect) during the execution of the jackpot effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and the effect contents according to the result. The control information of (button effect) is instruct | indicated with respect to display control CPU146.

  Step S758: In the post-operation of the variable prize apparatus, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the transition destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable prize device. For example, in the case of winning with “10 round probability variation symbols” and “16 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3”, the presentation control CPU 126 produces an effect indicating entry into the fireworks rush (shown in (Z) in FIG. 48, etc.). A process of selecting an effect (effect shown in FIG. 42 (G), etc.) indicating that the player has entered the coast mode in the case of winning with “10 round normal symbol”. Run.

[Lamp drive processing]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the lamp driving process. The lamp driving process includes an execution selection process (step S810), a lamp effect setting process before the effect symbol change (step S812), a lamp effect execution process during the effect symbol change (step S814), and a lamp effect execution process during the effect symbol stop display (step S814). S816) and a variable group winning device operating lamp effect execution process (step S818). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S810: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S812 to S818). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address and sets the end of the lamp driving process in the “jump table” as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the lamp effect corresponding to the variable display effect has not yet started, that is, if the effect data (variable effect pattern number) corresponding to the variable display effect pattern of the effect symbol is not set The effect control CPU 126 selects a lamp effect setting process (step S812) before changing the effect symbol as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the lamp effect setting process before the effect symbol change is already completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol changing lamp effect execution process (step S814) as the next jump destination, and executes the effect symbol change lamp effect execution. If the process has been completed, the effect symbol stop display in-progress lamp effect execution process (step S816) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, the variable winning device operating lamp effect execution process (step S818) is a big hit variable variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 15) or a small hit variable variable winning device management process (step in FIG. 15) in the main control CPU 72. Only when S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S812 to S816 are not executed.

  Step S812: In the lamp effect setting process before changing the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 is based on the result of the work for preparing the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol, that is, the set variable effect pattern. Based on the number (effect number), an operation is performed to prepare for driving the LED lamp during the effect display variation display effect, the stop display effect, and the demonstration effect. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S814: In the effect design changing lamp effect execution process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the lamp drive circuit 132 as necessary. For example, during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, control information for causing the various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 and the panel lamp 53 to emit light based on the lamp effect corresponding to the variable display effect is displayed on the lamp drive circuit 132. (Command is transmitted to the lamp driving circuit 132). Here, the lamp driving circuit 132 switches (or switches duty) driving voltages applied to various lamps based on the instructed control information, and manages operations such as light emission and blinking.

  Step S816: In the lamp effect execution process during the effect symbol stop display, the effect control CPU 126 performs various lamps 46, 48, based on the lamp effect corresponding to the stop display effect of the effect symbol, similarly to the lamp effect execution process during the effect symbol variation. 50, 52 and control information for causing the panel lamp 53 to emit light are instructed to the lamp driving circuit 132 (a command is transmitted to the lamp driving circuit 132). For example, control information for causing the various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 and the panel lamp 53 to emit light in white or rainbow color is generated and transmitted to the lamp driving circuit 132 based on whether or not it is a big hit.

  Step S818: In the variable effect winning device lamp effect execution process, the effect control CPU 126 responds to the big hit effect and the small hit effect in the same manner as the effect symbol changing lamp effect execution process and the effect symbol stop display lamp effect execution process. Based on the lamp effect, control information for causing the various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 and the panel lamp 53 to emit light is instructed to the lamp driving circuit 132 (command is transmitted to the lamp driving circuit 132).

[Ramp production setting process before production design change]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a lamp effect setting process before changing the effect symbol. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the variable effect pattern is selected. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs a change effect pattern (specifically, a small hit hour change effect pattern in the process of step S608, step S610, or step S612 of the previous effect symbol change pre-process (FIG. 81)). It is confirmed whether or not the big hit time fluctuation production pattern or the off-time fluctuation production pattern) is selected. In addition, when these fluctuation production patterns are not selected, it represents that the demonstration production pattern has been selected. As a result of the confirmation, when the variable effect pattern is selected (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S832. On the other hand, when the variation effect pattern is not selected (No), that is, when the demonstration effect pattern is selected, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S838.

  Step S832: The effect control CPU 126 confirms the effect pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect effect pattern selected in step S608, step S610, or step S612 of the previous effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 81) (specifically, the small hit time change). Fluctuation effect pattern number (effect number) of the effect pattern, the big hit fluctuation effect pattern, or the off-time fluctuation effect pattern), the notice effect pattern selected in the process of step S614, and the zone effect selected in the process of step S618 Check the pattern. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S834.

  Step S834: The effect control CPU 126 executes a lamp effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a lamp effect pattern corresponding to the effect pattern number confirmed in the previous process (step S833). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 reads lamp effect pattern data relating to the lamp effect pattern stored in advance in the ROM 128 as the lamp effect contents for driving the various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 and the panel lamp 53. The lamp effect pattern data is stored in a lighting pattern selection table (lighting pattern defining means) (not shown), and the lighting pattern selection table is a normal lighting pattern selection table (normal lighting pattern defining means) or a special lighting pattern selection table (special Various tables such as lighting pattern defining means) are included. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S836: The effect control CPU 126 executes lamp effect data setting processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting lamp effect data related to the lamp effect corresponding to the effect display variable display effect to be executed. Specifically, the lamp effect pattern selected in the previous process (step S834), lamp effect execution timing, lighting target lamp information, and the like are set as lamp effect data. The lamp effect pattern includes luminance information of each light emitter of the LED lamp. The lamp production execution timing includes information on which timing the LED lamp is lit after the start of fluctuation. The lighting target lamp information includes information about which LED lamp is to be lit. For example, in the case of the group notice effect, the lighting target lamp information is information for designating the LED lamps 53c to 53e, and in the case of the zone effect, the lighting target lamp information is the LED lamps 46a and 46b, the LED lamps 48a to 48g, This is information for designating the LED lamps 50a to 50g, the LED lamps 52a to 52i, and the LED lamps 52j to 52r. The lamp driving circuit 132 drives each LED lamp based on the lamp effect data.

  When the lamp effect data setting process (step S836) is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the lamp drive process (FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, in the previous process (step S830), when it is not possible to confirm that the variation effect pattern is selected (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect pattern is selected, the effect control CPU 126 next Step S838 is executed.

Step S841: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demonstration effect lamp effect data setting process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting lamp effect data corresponding to the demonstration effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 reads the lamp effect pattern data for demonstration effect stored in the ROM 128, and sets the read lamp effect data for demonstration effect.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the lamp driving process (FIG. 85).

[Lamp effect pattern selection processing]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure for lamp effect pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether the group notice effect is selected as the notice effect.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the group notice effect is selected as the notice effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S904 and cannot confirm that the group notice effect is selected as the notice effect ( No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S902.

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the zone effect is selected as the variable display effect.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the zone effect is selected as the variable display effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S912 and cannot confirm that the zone effect is selected as the variable display effect ( No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S922.

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 executes an execution lottery probability determination process according to success / failure. When the current variation is a variation at the time of winning, the effect control CPU 126 sets, for example, “1/2” as the execution lottery probability, whereas when the current variation is a variation at the time of non-winning, the effect control CPU 126 For example, “1/5” is set as the execution lottery probability.

  Step S906: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the execution lottery has been won. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a lottery is performed based on the execution lottery probability (“1/2” or “1/5”) set in the previous step S904.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the execution lottery has been won (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S908, and when it is not possible to confirm that the execution lottery has been won (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S910. .

  Step S908: The effect control CPU 126 executes special lighting pattern selection processing. Specifically, a process of selecting a lighting pattern used for a lamp effect using a special lighting pattern selection table is executed. Details of the special lighting pattern selection table will be described later. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of special lighting pattern selection tables are prepared. Therefore, the effect control CPU 126 determines which table to use in this process. The table selection method may be a method of selecting a predetermined table for a predetermined effect such as using a table whose target color is red if it is a group notice effect, Even in the same group notice effect, a method may be used in which tables with different target colors are selected by lottery according to the expected level of winning. In addition, the target color may be changed depending on the type of effect by using a table in which the target color is red for the group notice effect and using a table in which the target color is green for the zone effect.

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal lighting pattern selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting a lighting pattern used for a lamp effect using a normal lighting pattern selection table is executed. Details of the normal lighting pattern selection table will be described later.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 executes an execution lottery probability determination process according to success / failure. When the current variation is a variation at the time of winning, the effect control CPU 126 sets, for example, “1/4” as the execution lottery probability, whereas when the current variation is a variation at the time of non-winning, the effect control CPU 126 For example, “1/9” is set as the execution lottery probability.

  Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the execution lottery has been won. Specifically, it is checked whether or not a lottery is performed based on the execution lottery probability (“1/4” or “1/9”) set in the previous step S904.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the execution lottery has been won (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916, and when it is not possible to confirm that the execution lottery has been won (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S920. .

  Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes special lighting pattern selection processing. Specifically, a process of selecting a lighting pattern used for a lamp effect using a special lighting pattern selection table is executed. In this embodiment, since a plurality of types of special lighting pattern selection tables are prepared, the effect control CPU 126 determines which table to use in this process. Note that the table selection method is the same as the method described in step S906.

  Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 executes a time difference execution timing selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process for determining at what timing the lamp effect pattern selected in the previous step S916 is to be executed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines the execution timing of the lamp effect based on a time difference execution timing selection table described later.

  Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal lighting pattern selection process. Specifically, a process of selecting a lighting pattern used for a lamp effect using a normal lighting pattern selection table is executed. Details of the normal lighting pattern selection table will be described later.

  When step S908, step S910, step S918, or step S920 is executed, or when it is determined that the zone effect is not selected in the process of step S902 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S922. To do.

Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 executes other lighting pattern selection processing. Specifically, a process of selecting a lighting pattern used for a lamp effect related to effects other than the group notice effect and the zone effect is executed using an unillustrated other lighting pattern selection table.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the lamp effect setting process before the effect symbol change (FIG. 86).

  As described above, according to this control example, the special lamp effect using the special lighting pattern is executed at a higher frequency in the case of the big hit fluctuation than in the case of the deviation fluctuation, that is, when the expectation degree of the effect is high. For this reason, the special lighting pattern can be used or not used depending on the expectation level of the effect, and even when the same effect (group notice effect or zone effect) is executed, the effect depends on the type of lamp effect. As a result, the range of performance can be expanded.

[Special lighting pattern selection processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of special lighting pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure. In the example shown in the drawing, an example of a procedure for selecting a special lighting pattern using a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 2) of FIG. 95 described later is shown.

  Step S931: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the lighting pattern of the first frame. For example, when the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 2) in FIG. 95 is used, the effect control CPU 126 uses lighting patterns for lighting red, blue, and green LEDs with luminance 15 (= 100%). Execute the process to select. In the present embodiment, the luminance gradation is shown by 16 gradations from 0 to 15, but may be 256 gradations from 0 to 255. Here, the first frame is the first frame of the group notice effect in the case of the group notice effect, and the first frame of the shutter release effect in the case of the zone effect.

  Step S932: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting the lighting pattern of the second frame. For example, when using the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 2) of FIG. 95, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a lighting pattern for turning off the red, blue, and green LEDs.

  Step S933: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting the lighting pattern of the third frame. For example, when using the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 2) in FIG. 95, the effect control CPU 126 turns on the red LED with luminance 15 (= 100%), and turns the blue and green LEDs on. A process of selecting a lighting pattern to be turned off is executed.

  Step S934: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting the lighting pattern of the fourth frame. For example, when using the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 2) of FIG. 95, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a lighting pattern for turning off the red, blue, and green LEDs.

  Step S935: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the lighting pattern of the fifth frame. For example, when the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 2) of FIG. 95 is used, the effect control CPU 126 lights red and blue LEDs at a luminance of 15 (= 100%), and turns green LEDs on. A process of selecting a lighting pattern to be turned off is executed.

  Step S936: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a lighting pattern for the sixth frame. For example, when the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 2) of FIG. 95 is used, the effect control CPU 126 turns on the red LED with a luminance of 15 (= 100%) and a luminance of 10 (= 67%). ) To select a lighting pattern for turning on the blue LED and turning off the green LED.

  Step S937: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the lighting pattern of the seventh frame. For example, when the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 2) in FIG. 95 is used, the effect control CPU 126 turns on the red LED with luminance 15 (= 100%) and luminance 5 (= 33%). ) To select a lighting pattern for turning on the blue LED and turning off the green LED.

Step S938: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the lighting pattern of the eighth frame. For example, when using the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 2) in FIG. 95, the effect control CPU 126 turns on the red LED with luminance 15 (= 100%), and turns the blue and green LEDs on. A process of selecting a lighting pattern to be turned off is executed.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the lamp effect pattern selection process (FIG. 87).

[Normal lighting pattern selection processing]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of normal lighting pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure. In the illustrated example, an example of a procedure for selecting a normal lighting pattern using a normal lighting pattern selection table (target color: red) in FIG. 97 described later is shown.

  Step S940: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a lighting pattern from the first frame to the specified frame. The specified frame is at least the eighth frame when the group notice effect is executed, and is at least the 17th frame when the zone effect is executed. For example, when the group notice effect is executed and the normal lighting pattern selection table (target color: red) in FIG. 97 is used, the effect control CPU 126 performs luminance 15 (= 100) from the first frame to the eighth frame. %), A process of selecting a lighting pattern for turning on the red LED and turning off the blue and green LEDs is executed. As described above, when the group notice effect is executed, it is sufficient to determine at least the eighth frame. However, when the zone effect is executed, the brightness 15 (= 100%) from the first frame to at least the 17th frame. Then, a process of selecting a lighting pattern for turning on the red LED and turning off the blue and green LEDs is executed.

As described above, since the lighting pattern setting using the normal lighting pattern selection table is a common setting from the first frame to at least the specified frame, the data setting process for each frame can be simplified.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the lamp effect pattern selection process (FIG. 87).

[Special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red)]
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).
This table is a table used when executing a special lamp effect mainly of red in a group notice effect or a zone effect. In this table, the target color is red and the step change color is purple. Such a special lighting pattern selection table is a table used in step S908 or step S916 of the lamp effect pattern selection process (FIG. 87) (the same applies hereinafter).

In the uppermost column in the figure, the “number of frames” from the first frame to the ninth frame is displayed.
In the second to fourth columns from the top in the figure, the luminance (%) of the red LED, the luminance (%) of the green LED, and the luminance (%) of the blue LED are displayed.
In the lowermost column in the figure, a “display color” that is an actual emission color when the three LEDs emit light or extinguish simultaneously is displayed.

[First frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is white. As described above, the pattern in which the brightness of all LEDs is turned on at 100% corresponds to the entire lighting pattern.

[2nd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off). Thus, the pattern in which the brightness of all LEDs is turned on (that is, turned off) at 0% corresponds to the all-off pattern.

[3rd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red.

[4th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[5th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is purple.

[6th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is purple.

[7th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is purple.

[Eighth frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red.

[9th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red. Note that for the ninth and subsequent frames, the display color of 9 frames may be maintained, or another display color may be used.

[Special lighting pattern selection table (target color: blue)]
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: blue).
This table is used when executing a special lamp effect mainly of blue in the group notice effect or the zone effect. In this table, the target color is blue and the step change color is light blue. Note that the display in the uppermost column and the left column in the figure is as described in FIG. 90 (the same applies hereinafter).

[First frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is white.

[2nd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[3rd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is blue.

[4th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[5th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is light blue.

[6th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is light blue.

[7th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is light blue.

[Eighth frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is blue.

[9th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is blue. Note that for the ninth and subsequent frames, the display color of 9 frames may be maintained, or another display color may be used.

[Special lighting pattern selection table (target color: green)]
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: green).
This table is used when executing a special lamp effect mainly of green in the group notice effect and the zone effect. In this table, the target color is green and the step change color is yellow.

[First frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is white.

[2nd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[3rd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is green.

[4th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[5th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is yellow.

[6th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is yellow.

[7th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is yellow.

[Eighth frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is green.

[9th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is green. Note that for the ninth and subsequent frames, the display color of 9 frames may be maintained, or another display color may be used.

[Special lighting pattern selection table (target color: yellow)]
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: yellow).
This table is used when executing a special lamp effect mainly composed of yellow in the group notice effect and the zone effect. In this table, the target color is yellow and the step change color is orange.

[First frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is white.

[2nd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[3rd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is yellow.

[4th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[5th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 50%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is orange.

[6th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 50%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is orange.

[7th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 50%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is orange.

[Eighth frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is yellow.

[9th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is yellow. Note that for the ninth and subsequent frames, the display color of 9 frames may be maintained, or another display color may be used.

[Special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modification 1)]
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 1).
This table is a table used when executing a special lamp effect mainly of red in a group notice effect or a zone effect. In this table, the target color is red and the step change color is purple. The difference between the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red) described in FIG. 90 and Modification 1 is that the step change color arrangement section arranged before the final target color (red) is short. It is a point. Specifically, in the table of FIG. 90, the step change color (purple) is arranged from the fifth frame to the seventh frame, whereas in this table, the step change color (purple) is provided only in the fifth frame. It is arranged. For this reason, the final target color (red) is arranged from the sixth frame.

[First frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is white.

[2nd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[3rd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red.

[4th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[5th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is purple.

[6th to 9th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red. Note that for the ninth and subsequent frames, the display color of 9 frames may be maintained, or another display color may be used.

[Special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modification 2)]
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 2).
This table is a table used when executing a special lamp effect mainly of red in a group notice effect or a zone effect. In this table, the target color is red, and the step change colors are purple, light red purple, and deep red purple. The difference between the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red) described in FIG. 90 and the modification 2 is that the step change color arranged in front of the final target color (red) is changed step by step. This is the point that Specifically, in the table of FIG. 90, the same step change color (purple) is arranged from the fifth frame to the seventh frame, whereas in this table, the first step change color is set to the fifth frame. , Purple is arranged as the second step change color in the sixth frame, and dark red purple is arranged as the third step change color in the seventh frame.

[First frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is white.

[2nd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[3rd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red.

[4th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[5th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is purple.

[6th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 67%. For this reason, the display color is light reddish purple.

[7th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 33%. For this reason, the display color is dark reddish purple.

[Eighth frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red.

[9th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red. Note that for the ninth and subsequent frames, the display color of 9 frames may be maintained, or another display color may be used.

[Special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modification 3)]
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 3).
This table is a table used when executing a special lamp effect mainly of red in a group notice effect or a zone effect. In this table, the target color is red and the step change color is purple. The difference between the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red) described in FIG. 90 and Modification 3 is that the light emission modes of the first frame, the second frame, and the fourth frame are different. Specifically, in the table of FIG. 90, white is arranged in the first frame and black (lights off) is arranged in the second and fourth frames, whereas in this table, black (disappears) in the first frame. Off) and white in the second and fourth frames.

[First frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off).

[2nd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is white.

[3rd frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red.

[4th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 100%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is white.

[5th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is purple.

[6th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is purple.

[7th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 100%. For this reason, the display color is purple.

[Eighth frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red.

[9th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 100%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is red. Note that for the ninth and subsequent frames, the display color of 9 frames may be maintained, or another display color may be used.

  Here, the first to third modifications have been described using the example in which the target color is red, but can be applied to the case where the target color is blue, green, or yellow.

[Normal lighting pattern selection table (target color: red)]
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a normal lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).
This table is used when executing a normal lamp effect mainly of red in the group notice effect and the zone effect. In this table, the target color is red and the step change color is not defined. The normal lighting pattern selection table is a table used in step S910 or step S920 of the lamp effect pattern selection process (FIG. 87). Although not specifically illustrated, the normal lighting pattern selection tables for which the target colors are blue, green, and yellow exist as well as the red normal lighting pattern selection table.

[1st to 9th frame]
The brightness of the red LED is 0%, the brightness of the green LED is 0%, and the brightness of the blue LED is 0%. For this reason, the display color is black (lights off). Note that for the ninth and subsequent frames, the display color of 9 frames may be maintained, or another display color may be used.

[Lamp effect display color]
FIG. 98 is a conceptual diagram showing display colors when a lamp effect is executed using a special lighting pattern selection table.

The final target color is displayed on the vertical axis in the figure. Specifically, “red”, “blue”, “green”, and “yellow” are displayed in order from the top.
A frame is displayed on the horizontal axis in the figure. Specifically, the “number of frames” from the first frame to the ninth frame is displayed.

  When the target color is “red”, the display color shown in FIG. 90A can be expressed by using the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red) shown in FIG. Specifically, the first frame is “white”, the second frame is “black”, the third frame is “red”, the fourth frame is “black”, and the fifth to seventh frames are “ “Purple” and “Red” after the eighth frame. In the figure, for example, between the first frame and the second frame, the display color does not suddenly change from “white” to “black”, but from “white” to “black” step by step. The color is changing, which is due to the reaction rate of the LED lamp.

  When the target color is “blue”, the display color shown in (B) in the figure can be expressed by using the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: blue) shown in FIG. 91. Specifically, the first frame is “white”, the second frame is “black”, the third frame is “blue”, the fourth frame is “black”, and the fifth to seventh frames are “ “Blue” and “Blue” after the eighth frame.

  When the target color is “green”, the display color shown in (C) in the figure can be expressed by using the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: green) shown in FIG. Specifically, the first frame is “white”, the second frame is “black”, the third frame is “green”, the fourth frame is “black”, and the fifth to seventh frames are “ “Yellow” and “Green” after the eighth frame.

  When the target color is “yellow”, the display color shown in (D) in the figure can be expressed by using the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: yellow) shown in FIG. Specifically, it is “white” in the first frame, “black” in the second frame, “yellow” in the third frame, “black” in the fourth frame, and “black” in the fifth to seventh frames. “Orange” and “Yellow” after the eighth frame.

[Time difference execution timing selection table]
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a time difference execution timing selection table.
This table is a table used when each lamp is turned on with a time difference in the lamp effect when the zone effect is executed. This time difference execution timing selection table is a table used in step S918 of the lamp effect pattern selection process (FIG. 87).

  In the left column in the figure, the “number of frames” from the first frame to the ninth frame is displayed. The target lamp is displayed on the right column in the figure.

  In the first frame of the shutter release effect in the zone entry effect, the LED lamps 52a, 52b, 52j, and 52k start the lamp effect according to a lighting pattern based on, for example, a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).

  In the second frame of the shutter release effect in the zone entry effect, the LED lamps 52c, 52d, 52l, and 52m start the lamp effect according to a lighting pattern based on, for example, a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).

  In the third frame of the shutter opening effect in the zone entry effect, the LED lamps 52e, 52f, 52n, 52o start the lamp effect according to a lighting pattern based on, for example, a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).

  In the fourth frame of the shutter opening effect in the zone entry effect, the LED lamps 52g, 52h, 52p, 52q start the lamp effect according to the lighting pattern based on, for example, the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).

  In the fifth frame of the shutter release effect in the zone entry effect, the LED lamps 52i, 48a, 52r, and 50a start the lamp effect according to a lighting pattern based on, for example, a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).

  In the sixth frame of the shutter opening effect in the zone entry effect, the LED lamps 48b, 48c, 50b, 50c start the lamp effect according to a lighting pattern based on, for example, a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).

  In the seventh frame of the shutter opening effect in the zone entry effect, the LED lamps 48d, 48e, 50d, 50e start the lamp effect according to a lighting pattern based on, for example, a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).

  In the eighth frame of the shutter release effect in the zone entry effect, the LED lamps 48f, 48g, 50f, and 50g start the lamp effect according to a lighting pattern based on, for example, a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).

  In the ninth frame of the shutter release effect in the zone entry effect, the LED lamps 46a and 46b start the lamp effect according to a lighting pattern based on, for example, a special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red).

  As described above, in this embodiment, blinking is expressed by the lighting patterns from the first frame to the fourth frame of the group notice effect and the zone effect, and the gradation is applied by the lighting patterns from the fifth frame to the seventh frame. The light emission by the target color can be realized after the eighth frame. For this reason, according to this embodiment, the lamp effect can be executed smoothly to the final target color while giving a strong impact to the player at the start of lighting of the group notice effect and the zone effect. Can raise the sense of expectation.

  In the present embodiment, since the light emission pattern of the final target color is arranged in the lighting pattern of the third frame, the final purpose is included in the lighting patterns of blinking from the first frame to the fourth frame. A light emission pattern by color can be arranged, and a point where a final target color appears can be set as early as possible. For this reason, it is possible to execute a novel lamp effect in which the final target color can be suggested before the final target color is displayed in the eighth frame.

  Furthermore, according to the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modified example 3) of the present embodiment, since three step change colors (purple → light red purple → dark red purple) are defined, Thus, it is possible to execute a lamp effect such as approaching the target color (red), and to improve the effect.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the display period of the step change color can be a variable period. For example, in the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red) shown in FIG. 90, the display period of the step change color is three sections from the fifth frame to the seventh frame, and the special lighting pattern selection table ( In the target color: red: modification 1), the display period of the step change color is one section of the fifth frame. For this reason, the time to reach the final target color can be shortened or the time to reach the final target color can be lengthened, so that it can be flexibly adapted to various aspects of production. Can do.

  In the special lighting pattern selection table of this embodiment, a plurality of final target colors are prepared (red, green, blue, yellow, etc.). The lighting patterns used for the first frame, the second frame, and the fourth frame are used. It is used in common for multiple target colors. However, the special lighting pattern selection table (target color: red: modification 3) is excluded. For this reason, the portions other than the final target color and the step-change color that accompanies it can be shared, and the burden of creating table data can be reduced or the control process can be simplified. .

  In addition, although it is a special lighting pattern, a lighting pattern having a part that is shared in part not only reduces the burden of work and control processing, but also 3 frames for the player. It is possible to give pleasure such as what target color is displayed by the eyes.

  In the special lighting pattern selection table (except for the third modification example) of the present embodiment, “white” is arranged in the first frame and “black” is arranged in the second and fourth frames. While performing the lamp effect by flashing, the gradation can be started and the target color can finally be reached.

  In this case, since “white” is arranged in the first frame, the lighting state of the lamp so far can be reset at that time, and it is strongly suggested to the player that a new effect starts from there. You can make an impression. In addition, with such a table structure, the “target color” to be arranged in the third frame can be sandwiched between “black” in the second frame and the fourth frame. "Can be complemented.

  Moreover, in the zone effect of this embodiment, an LED lamp can be lighted gradually from bottom to top by using the same special lighting pattern with a time difference. As a result, a special lamp production with a high production effect as if light flows from the bottom to the top can be realized only by preparing a minimum special lighting pattern.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the group notice effect and the zone effect that are executed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 can be assisted by the special lamp effect. It can function synergistically with the contents of the display 42 to improve the overall effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the special lamp effect is described as being executed during the variable display effect, but may be executed during the main character effect. For example, a special lamp effect can be executed in accordance with the button striking effect described in the above treasure challenge.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (6)

Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game;
When the predetermined lottery is executed, the symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery after the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time triggered by this,
Effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect based on a result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means;
A lamp containing a plurality of basic light emitters corresponding to at least the three primary colors of light;
About the lighting pattern of the lamp, lighting pattern defining means for predefining a plurality of types of lighting patterns including special lighting patterns;
Based on the lighting pattern defined in the lighting pattern defining means, a lamp effect executing means for performing a lamp effect by controlling lighting of the lamp during execution of the predetermined effect;
For the special lighting pattern, the first lighting pattern to be used is defined as an all-lighting pattern for lighting all the plurality of basic light emitters or an all-off pattern for turning off all the plurality of basic light emitters. If the first lighting pattern used as the first lighting pattern is the all lighting pattern, the all lighting pattern is defined. If the first lighting pattern used is the all lighting pattern, the all lighting pattern is used. A lighting pattern is defined, a target color lighting pattern for lighting the lamp with a predetermined target color is defined as a third lighting pattern to be used, and the all lighting pattern or the lighting pattern used as a fourth lighting pattern is used. The all-off pattern is defined, and the lighting color of the lamp is used as the fifth lighting pattern. A step change color lighting pattern that is a color for stepwise leading to a predetermined target color and that is turned on with a step change color in which at least one of luminance and color of the predetermined target color is changed is defined, A gaming machine comprising: special lighting pattern defining means that defines the target color light emission pattern as a lighting pattern used after any of the fifth and subsequent timings. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The special lighting pattern defining means includes
A plurality of types of the step change color lighting patterns used in the fifth are defined;
The gaming machine characterized in that the target color light emission patterns used after the fifth are defined as lighting patterns to be used next to the plurality of types of step change color lighting patterns. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The production execution means
As the predetermined effect, finally execute a result output effect that outputs a positive result or a negative result,
The lamp production execution means
A gaming machine, wherein a lamp effect executed using the special lighting pattern is executed more frequently when the positive result is output than when the negative result is output. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The special lighting pattern defining means includes
A gaming machine, wherein when there are a plurality of the predetermined target colors, the lighting patterns used for the first, second and fourth are commonly used for a plurality of target colors. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The special lighting pattern defining means includes
The total lighting pattern is defined as the lighting pattern used for the first,
The all-off pattern is defined as the second lighting pattern used,
The gaming machine characterized in that the all-off pattern is defined as the fourth lighting pattern to be used. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The lamp is
There are several,
The lamp production execution means
A gaming machine characterized in that the lamp effect is executed by using a special lighting pattern defined by the lighting pattern defining means with a time difference for each of the plurality of lamps.